Documenti di Didattica
Documenti di Professioni
Documenti di Cultura
A8150BE-A
Issued February 2009
MSA5M1003A
Printed in USA 03/09
2010A
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Foreword
Congratulations on choosing a SUBARU vehicle. This Owner’s
Manual has all the information necessary to keep your SUBARU in
excellent condition and to properly maintain the emission control
system for minimizing emission pollutants. We urge you to read
this manual carefully so that you may understand your vehicle and
its operation. For information not found in this Owner’s Manual,
such as details concerning repairs or adjustments, please contact
the SUBARU dealer from whom you purchased your SUBARU or
the nearest SUBARU dealer.
The information, specifications and illustrations found in this
manual are those in effect at the time of printing. FUJI HEAVY
INDUSTRIES LTD. reserves the right to change specifications and
designs at any time without prior notice and without incurring any
obligation to make the same or similar changes on vehicles
previously sold. This Owner’s Manual applies to all models and
covers all equipment, including factory installed options. Some
explanations, therefore may be for equipment not installed in your
vehicle.
Please leave this manual in the vehicle at the time of resale. The
next owner will need the information found herein.
FUJI HEAVY INDUSTRIES LTD., TOKYO, JAPAN
*
C Copyright 2009 FUJI HEAVY INDUSTRIES LTD.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
This manual describes the following vehicle types.*
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
1
Warranties & Models with HID headlights How to use this Owner’s
Manual
& Warranties for U.S.A. CAUTION
All SUBARU vehicles distributed by & Using your Owner’s Manual
High Intensity Discharge (HID) head-
Subaru of America, Inc. and sold at retail Before you operate your vehicle, carefully
by an authorized SUBARU dealer in the lights contain mercury. For that
reason, it is necessary to remove read this manual. To protect yourself and
United States come with the following extend the service life of your vehicle,
warranties: HID headlights before vehicle dis-
posal. Once removed, please reuse, follow the instructions in this manual.
. SUBARU Limited Warranty recycle or dispose of the HID head- Failure to observe these instructions may
. Emission Control Systems Warranty lights as hazardous waste. result in serious injury and damage to your
. Emissions Performance Warranty vehicle.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
– CONTINUED –
2
Mark Name
Child restraint lower an-
chorages Turn signal
WARNING
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
– CONTINUED –
4
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
5
& Child safety The SRS airbag deploys with . Never leave unattended children
considerable speed and force in the vehicle. They could acci-
WARNING and can injure or even kill chil- dentally injure themselves or
dren, especially if they are 12 others through inadvertent op-
. Never hold a child on your lap or years of age and under and are eration of the vehicle. Also, on
in your arms while the vehicle is not restrained or improperly re- hot or sunny days, temperature
moving. The passenger cannot strained. Because children are in a closed vehicle could quickly
protect the child from injury in a lighter and weaker than adults, become high enough to cause
collision, because the child will their risk of being injured from severe or possibly fatal injuries
be caught between the passen- deployment is greater. to them.
ger and objects inside the vehi- . NEVER INSTALL A REARWARD
cle. FACING CHILD SEAT IN THE For instructions and precautions, carefully
. While riding in the vehicle, in- FRONT SEAT. DOING SO RISKS read the following sections.
fants and small children should SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH TO . For the seatbelt system, refer to “Seat-
always be placed in the REAR THE CHILD BY PLACING THE belts” F1-11.
seat in an infant or child restraint CHILD’S HEAD TOO CLOSE TO . For the child restraint system, refer to
system which is appropriate for THE SRS AIRBAG. “Child restraint systems” F1-23.
the child’s age, height and . Always turn the child safety locks . For the SRS airbag system, refer to
weight. If a child is too big for a to the “LOCK” position when “*SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint
child restraint system, the child children sit on the rear seat. System airbag)” F1-34.
should sit in the REAR seat and Serious injury could result if a
be restrained using the seatbelts. child accidentally opens the door & Engine exhaust gas (carbon
According to accident statistics, and falls out. Refer to “Child monoxide)
children are safer when properly safety locks” F2-19.
restrained in the rear seating
positions than in the front seat- . Always lock the passenger’s win- WARNING
ing positions. Never allow a child dows using the lock switch when
children are riding in the vehicle. . Never inhale engine exhaust gas.
to stand up or kneel on the seat. Engine exhaust gas contains
Failure to follow this procedure
. Put children aged 12 and under in could result in injury to a child carbon monoxide, a colorless
the REAR seat properly re- operating the power window. Re- and odorless gas which is dan-
strained at all times in a child fer to “Power windows” F2-20. gerous, or even lethal, if inhaled.
restraint device or in a seatbelt. . Always properly maintain the en-
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
– CONTINUED –
6
gine exhaust system to prevent & Drinking and driving & Drugs and driving
engine exhaust gas from enter-
ing the vehicle. WARNING WARNING
. Never run the engine in a closed
space, such as a garage, except Drinking and then driving is very There are some drugs (over the
for the brief time needed to drive dangerous. Alcohol in the blood- counter and prescription) that can
the vehicle in or out of it. stream delays your reaction time delay your reaction time and impair
and impairs your perception, judg- your perception, judgment and at-
. Avoid remaining in a parked ment and attentiveness. If you drive tentiveness. If you drive after taking
vehicle for a lengthy time while after drinking – even if you drink just them, it may increase your, your
the engine is running. If that is a little – it will increase the risk of passengers’ and other persons’ risk
unavoidable, then use the venti- being involved in a serious or fatal of being involved in a serious or
lation fan to force fresh air into accident, injuring or killing yourself, fatal accident.
the vehicle. your passengers and others. In
. Always keep the front ventilator addition, if you are injured in the If you are taking any drugs, check with
inlet grille free from snow, leaves accident, alcohol may increase the your doctor or pharmacist or read the
or other obstructions to ensure severity of that injury. literature that accompanies the medication
that the ventilation system al- Please don’t drink and drive. to determine if the drug you are taking can
ways works properly. impair your driving ability. Do not drive
. If at any time you suspect that Drunken driving is one of the most after taking any medications that can
exhaust fumes are entering the frequent causes of accidents. Since alco- make you drowsy or otherwise affect your
vehicle, have t he probl em hol affects all people differently, you may ability to safely operate a motor vehicle. If
checked and corrected as soon have consumed too much alcohol to drive you have a medical condition that requires
as possible. If you must drive safely even if the level of alcohol in your you to take drugs, please consult with
under these conditions, drive blood is below the legal limit. The safest your doctor.
only with all windows fully open. thing you can do is never drink and drive. Never drive if you are under the influence
. Keep the rear gate closed while However if you have no choice but to of any illicit mind-altering drugs. For your
driving to prevent exhaust gas drive, stop drinking and sober up comple- own health and well-being, we urge you
from entering the vehicle. tely before getting behind the wheel. not to take illegal drugs in the first place
and to seek treatment if you are addicted
to those drugs.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
7
& Driving when tired or sleepy & Modification of your vehicle & Driving with pets
Unrestrained pets can interfere with your
WARNING CAUTION driving and distract your attention from
driving. In a collision or sudden stop,
When you are tired or sleepy, your Your vehicle should not be modified unrestrained pets or cages can be thrown
reaction time will be delayed and other than with genuine SUBARU around inside the vehicle and hurt you or
your perception, judgment and at- parts and accessories. Other types your passengers. Besides, the pets can
tentiveness will be impaired. If you of modifications could affect its be hurt under these situations. It is also for
drive when tired or sleepy, your, performance, safety or durability, their own safety that pets should be
your passengers’ and other per- and may even violate governmental properly restrained in your vehicle. Re-
sons’ chances of being involved in regulations. In addition, damage or strain a pet with a special traveling
a serious accident may increase. performance problems resulting harness which can be secured to the rear
from modification may not be cov- seat with a seatbelt or use a pet carrier
Please do not continue to drive but ered under warranties. which can be secured to the rear seat by
instead find a safe place to rest if you routing a seatbelt through the carrier’s
are tired or sleepy. On long trips, you handle. Never restrain pets or pet carriers
should make periodic rest stops to refresh & Car phone/cell phone and in the front passenger’s seat. For further
yourself before continuing on your journey. driving information, consult your veterinarian,
When possible, you should share the local animal protection society or pet
driving with others. CAUTION shop.
Do not use a car phone/cell phone
while driving; it may distract your
attention from driving and can lead
to an accident. If you use a car
phone/cell phone, pull off the road
and park in a safe place before
using your phone. In some States/
Provinces, only hands-free phones
may legally be used while driving.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
– CONTINUED –
8
& Tire pressures & California proposition 65 order to prevent serious injury or death
Check and, if necessary, adjust the warning due to loss of control, rollover and other
pressure of each tire (including the spare) accidents. Refer to “On-pavement and off-
at least once a month and before any long WARNING road driving” F8-6.
journey.
Engine exhaust, some of its consti-
Check the tire pressure when the tires are tuents, and certain vehicle compo-
cold. Use a pressure gauge to adjust the nents contain or emit chemicals
tire pressures to the values shown on the known to the State of California to
tire placard. For detailed information, refer cause cancer and birth defects or
to “Tires and wheels” F11-31. other reproductive harm. In addi-
tion, certain fluids in vehicles and
WARNING certain components of product wear
contain or emit chemicals known to
Driving at high speeds with exces-
the State of California to cause
sively low tire pressures can cause
cancer and birth defects or other
the tires to deform severely and to
reproductive harm.
rapidly become hot. A sharp in-
crease in temperature could cause
tread separation, and destruction of
the tires. The resulting loss of
& On-pavement and off-road
vehicle control could lead to an driving
accident. This vehicle is classified as a utility
vehicle. Utility vehicles have a significantly
higher rollover rate than other types of
vehicles. Your vehicle has a higher ground
clearance and higher center of gravity,
making it more likely to roll over than
ordinary passenger cars. It also handles
and maneuvers differently from other
passenger cars. For this reason, please
read carefully the following section and
follow the instructions and precautions in
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Table of contents
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
11
1) Rear window defogger button
(page 3-35)
2) Fuel filler lid and cap (page 7-4)
3) Child safety locks (page 2-19)
4) Tie-down hook (page 9-13)
5) Rear gate (page 2-22)
6) Towing hook (page 9-13)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
– CONTINUED –
12
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
13
1) Center console (page 6-5)
2) Cup holder (page 6-8)
3) Front power supply socket (page 6-9)
4) Glove box (page 6-5)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
– CONTINUED –
14
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
15
& Light control and wiper control levers/switches 1) Windshield wiper (page 3-30)
2) Mist (page 3-31)
3) Windshield washer (page 3-31)
4) Rear window wiper and washer switch
(page 3-32)
5) Wiper intermittent time control switch
(page 3-31)
6) Wiper control lever (page 3-29)
7) Light control switch (page 3-25)
8) Fog light switch (page 3-28)
9) Headlight ON/OFF (page 3-26)
10) Headlight flasher High/Low beam
change (page 3-26)
11) Turn signal (page 3-27)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
– CONTINUED –
16
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
17
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
– CONTINUED –
18
& Warning and indicator lights Mark Name Page Mark Name Page
Mark Name Page / ABS warning light 3-16 Front fog light indicator 3-21
light (if equipped)
Seatbelt warning light 3-10
/ Brake system warning 3-17 Security indicator light 3-20
light
Front passenger’s seat- 3-10
belt warning light
Door open warning light 3-18 Headlight indicator light 3-21
SRS airbag system 3-11
warning light AWD warning light Cruise control indicator
(AT models) 3-18 light 3-21
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
19
Function settings
A SUBARU dealer can change the settings of the functions shown in the following table to meet your personal requirements. Contact
the nearest SUBARU dealer for details. If your vehicle is equipped with the genuine SUBARU navigation system, the settings for some
of these functions can be changed using the navigation monitor. For details, please refer to the Owner’s Manual supplement for the
navigation system.
Item Function Possible settings Default setting Page
Alarm system Alarm system Operation/Non-operation Operation 2-14
Monitoring start delay time (after closure 0 second/30 seconds 30 seconds 2-16
of doors)
Impact sensor operation (only vehicles Operation/Non-operation Non-operation 2-19
with shock sensors (dealer option))
Passive arming Operation/Non-operation Non-operation 2-17
Dome light/map lights illumination ON/OFF OFF 2-14
Remote keyless entry sys- Hazard warning flasher Operation/Non-operation Operation 2-7
tem
Audible signal Operation/Non-operation Operation 2-10
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
1-2 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
Front seats position when the SRS airbag with considerable speed and force
deploys could suffer very serious and can injure or even kill children,
injuries. Because the SRS airbag especially if they are 12 years of age
WARNING needs enough space for deploy- and under and are not restrained or
ment, the driver should always improperly restrained. Because chil-
. Never adjust the seat while driv- sit upright and well back in the dren are lighter and weaker than
ing to avoid the possibility of seat as far from the steering adults, their risk of being injured
loss of vehicle control and of wheel as practical while still from deployment is greater. For that
personal injury. maintaining full vehicle control reason, we strongly recommend
. Before adjusting the seat, make and the front passenger should that ALL children (including those
sure the hands and feet of rear move the seat as far back as in child seats and those that have
seat passengers and cargo are possible and sit upright and well outgrown child restraint devices) sit
clear of the adjusting mechan- back in the seat. in the REAR seat properly re-
ism. strained at all times in a child
. Seatbelts provide maximum re- restraint device or in a seatbelt,
straint when the occupant sits whichever is appropriate for the
well back and upright in the seat. child’s age, height and weight. Se-
To reduce the risk of sliding cure ALL types of child restraint
under the seatbelt in a collision, devices (including forward facing
the front seatbacks should be child seat) in the REAR seats at all
always used in the upright posi- times.
tion while the vehicle is running. NEVER INSTALL A REARWARD FA-
If the front seatbacks are not CING CHILD SEAT IN THE FRONT
used in the upright position in a SEAT. DOING SO RISKS SERIOUS
collision, the risk of sliding under INJURY OR DEATH TO THE CHILD
the lap belt and of the lap belt BY PLACING THE CHILD’S HEAD
sliding up over the abdomen will TOO CLOSE TO THE SRS AIRBAG.
increase, and both can result in According to accident statistics,
serious internal injury or death. WARNING children are safer when properly
. The SRS airbags deploy with Put children aged 12 and under in restrained in the rear seating posi-
considerable speed and force. the rear seat properly restrained at tions than in the front seating posi-
Occupants who are out of proper all times. The SRS airbag deploys tions. For instructions and precau-
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-3
WARNING
Pull the reclining lever up and adjust the
seatback to the desired position. Then To prevent the passenger from slid-
release the lever and make sure the ing under the seatbelt in the event of
seatback is securely locked into place. a collision, always put the seatback
The seatback placed in a reclined position in the upright position while the
can spring back upward with force when vehicle is in motion. Also, do not
Pull the lever upward and slide the seat to the lever is pulled. While operating the place objects such as cushions
the desired position. Then release the lever to return the seatback, hold the between the passenger and the
lever and move the seat back and forth to seatback lightly so that it may be raised seatback. If you do so, the risk of
make sure that it is securely locked into back gradually. sliding under the lap belt and of the
place. lap belt sliding up over the abdomen
will increase, and both can result in
serious internal injury or death.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
– CONTINUED –
1-4 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
! Seat cushion height adjustment & Power seat (driver’s seat – if justment of the seat, you cannot adjust
the seat cushion angle or seat cushion
(driver’s seat) equipped) height.
2) Seat cushion angle control switch
To adjust the seat cushion angle, pull up
or push down the front end of the control
switch.
3) Seatback angle (reclining) control
switch
To adjust the angle of the seatback,
move the control switch.
4) Seat height control switch
To adjust the seat height, pull up or push
down the rear end of the control switch.
5) Lumbar support control switch
To increase lower back support, push the
front side of the switch. To decrease
1) When the lever is pushed down, the seat lower back support, push the rear side of
is lowered. the switch.
2) When the lever is pulled up, the seat
rises.
The height of the seat can be adjusted by
moving the seat cushion adjustment lever
up and down.
WARNING
To raise the head restraint, pull it up. & Active head restraint
To lower it, push the head restraint down
To prevent the passenger from slid- while pressing the release button on the
ing under the seatbelt in the event of top of the seatback.
a collision, always put the seatback . To remove the head restraint
in the upright position while the While pressing the release button, pull out
vehicle is in motion. Also, do not the head restraint.
place objects such as cushions . To install the head restraint
between the passenger and the Install the head restraint into the holes that
seatback. If you do so, the risk of are located on the top of seatback until it
sliding under the lap belt and of the locks.
lap belt sliding up over the abdomen
will increase, and both can result in The head restraint should be adjusted so
serious internal injury or death. that the center of the head restraint is
closest to the top of the occupant’s ears. The front seats of your vehicle are
equipped with active head restraints. They
& Head restraint adjustment WARNING automatically tilt forward slightly in the
Never drive the vehicle with the event the vehicle is struck from the rear,
head restraints removed because decreasing the amount of rearward head
they are designed to reduce the risk movement and thus reducing the risk of
of serious neck injury in the event whiplash. For maximum effectiveness, the
that the vehicle is struck from the head restraint should be adjusted so that
rear. Therefore, when you remove the center of the head restraint is closest
the head restraints, you must re- to the top of the occupant’s ears.
install all of the head restraints to
CAUTION
protect vehicle occupants.
. Each active head restraint is
effective only when its height is
properly adjusted and driver/pas-
1) Head restraint senger sits in the correct posi-
2) Release button tion on the seat.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
– CONTINUED –
1-6 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
. If your vehicle is involved in a Seat heater (if equipped) adjustment dial for each seat heater
rear-end collision, have an illuminates when that seat heater is
authorized SUBARU dealer in- activated.
spect the active head restraints. When the vehicle’s interior is warmed
. The active head restraints may enough or before you leave the vehicle,
not operate in the event the always turn the adjustment dial to the
vehicle experiences only a slight most rearward position so that the “ ”
impact in the rear. mark reaches to the “OFF” position.
. The active head restraints may be CAUTION
damaged if they are pushed hard
from behind or subjected to . There is a possibility that people
shock. As a result, they may not with delicate skin may suffer
function if the vehicle suffers a slight burns even at low tempera-
rear impact. tures if they use the seat heater
for a long period of time. When
Each front seat is equipped with a seat using the heater, always be sure
heater. to warn the persons concerned.
The seat heater operates when the igni- . Do not put anything on the seat
tion switch is either in the “Acc” or “ON” which insulates against heat,
position. such as a blanket, cushion, or
similar items. This may cause the
Each seat heater has four levels of
seat heater to overheat.
adjustment. To use the heater in the
right-hand seat, turn the “R” adjustment
dial forward until the “ ” mark reaches the NOTE
desired position. To activate the heater in Use of the seat heater for a long period
the left-hand seat, turn the “L” adjustment of time while the engine is not running
dial forward until the “ ” mark reaches the can cause battery discharge.
desired position. Each heater warms the
seat most quickly with the “ ” mark on the
adjustment dial in the furthest-forward
position. An indicator light next to the
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-7
WARNING
To lower the armrest, pull on the top edge
WARNING Never stack luggage or other cargo of the armrest.
higher than the top of the seatback
Seatbelts provide maximum re- because it could tumble forward and WARNING
straint when the occupant sits well injure passengers in the event of a
sudden stop or accident. To avoid the possibility of serious
back and upright in the seat. Do not
injury, passengers must never be
put cushions or any other materials
allowed to sit on the center armrest
between occupants and seatbacks
while the vehicle is in motion.
or seat cushions. If you do so, the
risk of sliding under the lap belt and
of the lap belt sliding up over the
abdomen will increase, and both can
result in serious internal injury or
death.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
– CONTINUED –
1-8 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
Then release the switch and make sure . For vehicles equipped with the 1. Lower the head restraints.
the seatback is securely locked into place. rear seat center table, when fold- 2. Unlock the seatback by pulling the
ing down the rear seatback, re- release knob and then fold the seatback
& Folding down the rear seat- turn the rear seat center table to down.
back its original position. If the rear To return the seatback to its original
seat center table is not returned position, raise the seatback until it locks
WARNING to its original position, the rear into place and make sure that it is securely
seat center table could break and locked.
. After returning the rear seatback bodily injury could occur.
to its original position, be certain
to place all of the seatbelts and
the tab attached to the seat CAUTION
cushion above the seat cushion.
And make certain that the Vehicles with the reclining function
shoulder belts are fully visible. may automatically fold down
strongly because of it’s internal
. Never allow passengers to ride spring. Operate the seatback assist-
on the folded rear seatback or in ing with your hands.
the cargo area. Doing so may
result in serious injury or death.
. Secure all objects and especially
long items properly to prevent
them from being thrown around
inside the vehicle and causing
serious injury during a sudden
stop, a sudden steering maneu-
ver or a rapid acceleration.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-11
tions only) and then if necessary move the & Emergency Locking Retrac- Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) mode.
child closer to the belt buckle to help tor (ELR)
provide a good shoulder belt fit. Care must When the child restraint system is re-
be taken to securely place the lap belt as The driver’s seatbelt has an Emergency moved, make sure that the seatbelt
low as possible on the hips and not on the Locking Retractor (ELR). retracts fully and the retractor returned to
child’s waist. If the shoulder portion of the The emergency locking retractor allows the Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR)
belt cannot be properly positioned, a child normal body movement but the retractor mode.
restraint system should be used. Never locks automatically during a sudden stop, For instructions on how to convert the
place the shoulder belt under the child’s impact or if you pull the belt very quickly retractor to the ALR mode and restore it to
arm or behind the child’s back. out of the retractor. the ELR mode, refer to “Installing child
restraint systems with A/ELR seatbelt”
! Expectant mothers & Automatic/Emergency Lock- F1-26.
ing Retractor (A/ELR)
Each passenger’s seatbelt has an Auto- & Seatbelt warning light
matic/Emergency Locking Retractor (A/ and chime
ELR). The Automatic/Emergency Locking Your vehicle is equipped with a seatbelt
Retractor normally functions as an Emer- warning device at the driver’s and front
gency Locking Retractor (ELR). The A/ passenger’s seat, as required by current
ELR has an additional locking mode safety standards.
“Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) With the ignition switch turned to the “ON”
mode” intended to secure a child restraint position, this device reminds the driver
system. When the seatbelt is once drawn and front passenger to fasten their seat-
out completely and is then retracted even belts by illuminating the warning lights in
slightly, the retractor locks the seatbelt in the locations indicated in the following
that position and the seatbelt cannot be illustration and sounding a chime.
Expectant mothers also need to use the
extended. As the belt is rewinding, clicks
seatbelts. They should consult their doctor
will be heard which indicate the retractor
for specific recommendations. The lap belt
functions as an ALR. When the seatbelt is
should be worn securely and as low as
retracted fully, the ALR mode is released.
possible over the hips, not over the waist.
When securing a child restraint system on
the rear seats by the use of the seatbelt,
the seatbelt must be changed over to the
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-13
the ignition switch is turned to the “ON” turned ON next time, however, the
position, the seatbelt warning light(s) will complete sequence of the warning
flash for 6 seconds, to warn that the operation resumes. For further details
seatbelt(s) is/are unfastened. If the dri- about canceling the warning operation,
ver’s seatbelt is not fastened, a chime will please contact your SUBARU dealer.
also sound simultaneously. If there is no passenger on the front
NOTE passenger’s seat, the seatbelt warning
device for the front passenger’s seat will
. If the driver’s and/or front passen- be deactivated. The front passenger’s
ger’s seatbelt(s) are/is still not fastened occupant detection system monitors
6 seconds later, the seatbelt warning whether or not there is a passenger on
device operates as follows according the front passenger’s seat.
to the vehicle speed.
Observe the following precautions. Failure
Driver’s warning light – At speeds lower than approxi-
to do so may prevent the device from
mately 9 mph (15 km/h)
functioning correctly or cause the device
The warning light(s) for unfastened
to fail.
seatbelt(s) will alternate between
steady illumination and flashing at . Do not install any accessory such as a
15-second intervals. The chime will table or TV onto the seatback.
not sound. . Do not store a heavy load in the
– At speeds higher than approxi- seatback pocket.
mately 9 mph (15 km/h) . Do not allow the rear seat occupant to
The warning light(s) for unfastened place his/her hands or legs on the front
seatbelt(s) will alternate between passenger’s seatback, or allow him/her to
flashing and steady illumination at pull the seatback.
15-second intervals and the chime . Do not use front seats with their back-
will sound while the warning light(s) ward-forward position and seatback not
Front passenger’s warning light is/are flashing. being locked into place securely. If any of
. It is possible to cancel the warning them are not locked securely, adjust them
! Operation operation that follows the 6-second again. For the adjustment procedure of
If the driver and/or front passenger have/ warning after turning ON the ignition the manual seats, refer to “Manual seat”
has not yet fastened the seatbelt(s) when switch. When the ignition switch is F1-3.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
– CONTINUED –
1-14 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
If the seatbelt warning device for the front increase the risk or severity of . Do not put cushions or any other
passenger’s seat does not function cor- injury. materials between occupants
rectly (e.g., it is activated even when the . Keep the lap belt as low as and seatbacks or seat cushions.
front passenger’s seat is empty or it is possible on your hips. In a colli- If you do so, the risk of sliding
deactivated even when the front passen- sion, this spreads the force of the under the lap belt and of the lap
ger has not fastened his/her seatbelt), lap belt over stronger hip bones belt sliding up over the abdomen
take the following actions. instead of across the weaker will increase, and both can result
. Ensure that no article is placed on the abdomen. in serious internal injury or
seat other than a child restraint system death.
. Seatbelts provide maximum re-
and the child occupant, although we
straint when the occupant sits
strongly recommended that all children
well back and upright in the seat.
sit in the rear seat properly restrained.
To reduce the risk of sliding
. Ensure that there is no article left in the under the seatbelt in a collision,
seatback pocket. the front seatbacks should be
. Ensure that the backward-forward po- always used in the upright posi-
sition and seatback of front passenger’s tion while the vehicle is running.
seat are locked into place securely by If the front seatbacks are not
moving the seat back and forth. used in the upright position in a
collision, the risk of sliding under
If the seatbelt warning device for front
the lap belt and of the lap belt
passenger’s seat still does not function
sliding up over the abdomen will
correctly after taking relevant corrective
increase, and both can result in
actions described above, immediately
serious internal injury or death.
contact your SUBARU dealer for an
inspection. WARNING
& Fastening the seatbelt Never place the shoulder belt under
the arm or behind the back. If an
accident occurs, this can increase
WARNING
the risk or severity of injury.
. Never use a belt that is twisted or
reversed. In an accident, this can
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-15
! Front seatbelts
1. Adjust the seat position according to
the following procedure.
Driver’s seat: Adjust the seatback to the 4. Insert the tongue plate into the buckle
upright position. Move the seat as far from until you hear a click.
the steering wheel as practical while still
maintaining full vehicle control. The shoulder belt anchor height should be
adjusted to the position best suited for the
Front passenger’s seat: Adjust the seat-
driver/front passenger.
back to the upright position. Move the seat
as far back as possible. To lower the anchor height, pull the
release knob and slide the anchor down.
2. Sit well back in the seat.
To raise the anchor height, slide the
3. Pick up the tongue plate and pull the
anchor up. Pull down on the anchor to
belt out slowly. Do not let it get twisted. If
make sure that it is locked in place.
the belt stops before reaching the buckle,
return the belt slightly and pull it out more Always adjust the anchor height so that
slowly. If the belt still cannot be unlocked, the shoulder belt passes over the middle
let the belt retract slightly after giving it a of the shoulder without touching the neck.
strong pull, then pull it out slowly again.
5. To make the lap part tight, pull up on
the shoulder belt.
6. Place the lap belt as low as possible
on your hips, not on your waist.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
– CONTINUED –
1-16 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-17
WARNING WARNING
Fastening the seatbelt with the web- Be sure to fasten both tongue plates
bing twisted can increase the risk or to the respective buckles. If the
severity of injury in an accident. seatbelt is used only as a shoulder
1) Center seatbelt tongue plate When fastening the belt after it is belt (with the connector’s tongue
2) Connector (tongue) pulled out from the retractor, espe- plate not fastened to the connec-
3) Connector (buckle) cially when inserting the connec- tor’s buckle on the right-hand side),
4) Center seatbelt buckle tor’s tongue plate into the mating it cannot properly restrain the wear-
buckle (on right-hand side), always er in position in an accident, possi-
check that the webbing is not bly resulting in serious injury or
twisted. death.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
– CONTINUED –
1-18 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
The rear center seatbelt is stowed in a 4. Insert the center seatbelt tongue plate
recessed compartment located in the into the center seatbelt buckle marked
ceiling above the cargo area. 3. After confirming that the webbing is not “CENTER” on the left-hand side until it
1. Remove the tongue plate from the slot twisted, insert the connector (tongue) clicks.
in the recessed compartment and pull out attached at the webbing end into the
the seatbelt slowly. buckle on the right-hand side until a click
is heard.
If the belt stops before reaching the
buckle, return the belt slightly and pull it
out more slowly. If the belt still cannot be
unlocked, let the belt retract slightly after
giving it a strong pull, then pull it out slowly
again.
6. Place the lap belt as low as possible You should hold the webbing end and
on your hips, not on your waist. guide it back into the retractor while it is
rolling up. Neatly store the tongue plate in
! Unfastening the seatbelt the recessed compartment and then insert
the connector (tongue) plate into the slot.
. Have the seatbelt fully rolled up Front seatbelt pretensioners seat occupant.
so that the tongue plates are
When a seatbelt pretensioner is activated,
neatly stored. A hanging tongue
an operating noise will be heard and a
plate can swing and hit against
small amount of smoke will be released.
the trim during driving, causing
These occurrences are normal and not
damage to the trim.
harmful. This smoke does not indicate a
fire in the vehicle.
& Seatbelt maintenance
Once the seatbelt pretensioner has been
To clean the seatbelts, use a mild soap activated, the seatbelt retractor remains
and lukewarm water. Never bleach or dye locked. Consequently, the seatbelt can not
the belts because this could seriously be pulled out and retracted and therefore
affect their strength. must be replaced.
Inspect the seatbelts and attachments NOTE
including the webbing and all hardware
periodically for cracks, cuts, gashes, The driver’s and front passenger’s seat- . Seatbelt pretensioners are not de-
tears, damage, loose bolts or worn areas. belts have a seatbelt pretensioner. The signed to activate in minor frontal or
Replace the seatbelts even if only minor seatbelt pretensioners for the driver’s seat side impacts or in rear impacts.
damage is found. and front passenger’s seat operate at the . The driver’s seat and passenger’s
same time as the frontal, and side SRS seat pretensioners and frontal, side or
CAUTION airbags. If the vehicle rolls over, they curtain SRS airbags operate simulta-
operate simultaneously with the curtain neously.
. Keep the belts free of polishes, airbag. . Pretensioners are designed to func-
oils, chemicals and particularly tion on a one-time-only basis. In the
battery acid. The front and side airbag sensors and the event that a pretensioner is activated,
rollover sensor are used as the preten- both the driver’s and front passenger’s
. Never attempt to make modifica-
sioner sensors. If a sensor detects a seatbelt retractor assemblies must be
tions or changes that will prevent
certain predetermined amount of force replaced only by an authorized
the seatbelt from operating prop-
during a frontal collision, a side impact SUBARU dealer. When replacing seat-
erly.
collision or a rollover collision, the front belt retractor assemblies, use only
seatbelt is quickly drawn back in by the genuine SUBARU parts.
retractor to take up the slack so that the
belt more effectively restrains the front
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-21
. If either front seatbelt does not equipped with seatbelt preten- seatbelt pretensioner, the SRS airbag
retract or cannot be pulled out due to s i o n e r s, s e e y o u r n e a r e s t system warning light will illuminate. The
a malfunction or activation of the SUBARU dealer. SRS airbag system warning light will show
pretensioner, contact your SUBARU . When discarding front seatbelt normal system operation by lighting for
dealer as soon as possible. retractor assemblies or scrap- approximately 6 seconds when the igni-
. If the front seatbelt retractor assem- ping the entire vehicle due to tion switch is turned to the “ON” position.
bly or surrounding area has been collision damage or for other
damaged, contact your SUBARU dealer The following components are monitored
reasons, consult your SUBARU by the indicator:
as soon as possible. dealer.
. When you sell your vehicle, we urge . Front sub sensor (right-hand side)
you to explain to the buyer that it has . Front sub sensor (left-hand side)
seatbelt pretensioners by alerting him & System monitors . Airbag control module (including im-
to the contents of this section. pact and rollover sensors)
. Frontal airbag module (driver’s side)
WARNING . Frontal airbag module (front passen-
ger’s side)
. To obtain maximum protection, . Side airbag sensor (center pillar right-
the occupants should sit in an hand side)
upright position with their seat-
belts properly fastened. Refer to . Side airbag sensor (center pillar left-
“Seatbelts” F1-11. hand side)
. Side airbag module (driver’s side)
. Do not modify, remove or strike
the front seatbelt retractor as- . Side airbag module (front passenger’s
semblies or surrounding area. side)
This could result in accidental . Curtain airbag sensor (rear wheel
activation of the seatbelt preten- house right-hand side)
SRS airbag system warning light
sioners or could make the sys- . Curtain airbag sensor (rear wheel
tem inoperative, possibly result- A diagnostic system continually monitors house left-hand side)
ing in serious injury. Seatbelt the readiness of the seatbelt pretensioner . Curtain airbag module (right side)
while the vehicle is being driven. The
pretensioners have no user-ser- . Curtain airbag module (left side)
viceable parts. For required ser- seatbelt pretensioners share the control
module with the SRS airbag system. . Satellite safing sensor (under the rear
vicing of front seatbelt retractors center seat)
Therefore, if any malfunction occurs in a
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
– CONTINUED –
1-22 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
. Seatbelt pretensioner (driver’s side) . No illumination of the warning . Tampering with or disconnecting
. Seatbelt pretensioner (front passen- light when the ignition switch is the system’s wiring could result
ger’s side) first turned to the “ON” position in accidental activation of the
. Seatbelt buckle switch (front passen- . Continuous illumination of the seatbelt pretensioner and/or
ger’s side) warning light SRS airbag or could make the
. Front passenger’s seatbelt tension system inoperative, which may
. Illumination of the warning light result in serious injury. Do not
sensor while driving use electrical test equipment on
. Front passenger’s occupant detection
any circuit related to the seatbelt
system weight sensor
pretensioner and SRS airbag
. Front passenger’s occupant detection & System servicing systems. For required servicing
control module of the seatbelt pretensioner, con-
. Front passenger’s frontal airbag ON WARNING sult your nearest SUBARU deal-
and OFF indicator er.
. All related wiring . When discarding a seatbelt re-
tractor assembly or scrapping
WARNING the entire vehicle damaged by a CAUTION
collision, consult your SUBARU
If the warning light exhibits any of dealer. The front sub sensors are located
the following conditions, there may on both the right and left sides at the
be a malfunction in the seatbelt front of the vehicle, and the SRS
pretensioners and/or SRS airbag airbag control module including the
system. Immediately take your vehi- impact sensors is located under the
cle to your nearest SUBARU dealer center console. If you need service
to have the system checked. Unless or repair in those areas or near the
checked and properly repaired, the front seatbelt retractors, have the
seatbelt pretensioners and/or SRS work performed by your authorized
airbag will not operate properly in SUBARU dealer.
the event of a collision, which may
increase the risk of injury.
. Flashing or flickering of the warn-
NOTE
ing light If the front part of the vehicle is
damaged in an accident to the extent
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-23
that the seatbelt pretensioner does not Child restraint systems properly secured in the vehicle. When
operate, contact your SUBARU dealer installing the child restraint system, care-
as soon as possible. fully follow the manufacturer’s instructions.
According to accident statistics, children
& Precautions against vehicle are safer when properly restrained in the
modification rear seating positions than in the front
Always consult your SUBARU dealer if seating positions.
you want to install any accessory parts to All U.S. states and Canadian provinces
your vehicle. require that infants and small children be
restrained in an approved child restraint
CAUTION system at all times while the vehicle is
Do not perform any of the following moving.
modifications. Such modifications
can interfere with proper operation
of the seatbelt pretensioners. Infants and small children should always
. Attachment of any equipment be placed in an infant or child restraint
(bush bar, winches, snow plow, system in the rear seat while riding in the
skid plate, etc.) other than genu- vehicle. You should use an infant or child
ine SUBARU accessory parts to restraint system that meets Federal Motor
the front end. Vehicle Safety Standards or Canada
Motor Vehicle Safety Standards, is com-
. Modification of the suspension patible with your vehicle and is appro-
system or front end structure. priate for the child’s age and size. All child
. Installation of a tire of different restraint systems are designed to be
size and construction from the secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or
tires specified on the vehicle the lap belt portion of a lap/shoulder belt
placard attached to the driver’s (except those described in “Installation of WARNING
door pillar or specified for indivi- child restraint systems by use of lower and
dual vehicle models in this Own- tether anchorages (LATCH)” F1-30). Never let a passenger hold a child
er’s Manual. on his or her lap or in his or her
Children could be endangered in an
arms while the vehicle is moving.
accident if their child restraints are not
The passenger cannot protect the
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
– CONTINUED –
1-24 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
child from injury in a collision, or in an accident and can be injured A: Front passenger’s seat
because the child will be caught seriously. You should not install a child restraint
between the passenger and objects Additionally, children standing up or system (including a booster seat) due to
inside the vehicle. kneeling on or in front of the front the hazard to children posed by the
Additionally, holding a child in your seat are exposed another serious passenger’s airbag.
lap or arms in the front seat exposes danger. Since the SRS airbag de- B: Rear seat, window-side seating
that child to another serious danger. ploys with considerable speed and positions
Since the SRS airbag deploys with force, the child could be injured or
Recommended positions for all types of
considerable speed and force, the even killed.
child restraint systems.
child could be injured or even killed.
In these positions, Automatic/Emergency
& Where to place a child re- Locking Retractor (A/ELR) seatbelts and
straint system lower anchorages (bars) are provided for
installing a child restraint system.
The following are SUBARU’s recommen- Some types of child restraints might not be
dations on where to place a child restraint able to be secured firmly due to projection
system in your vehicle. of the seat cushion.
In this seating position, you should use
only a child restraint system that has a
bottom base that fits snugly against the
contours of the seat cushion and can be
securely retained using the seatbelt.
C: Rear seat, center seating position
Installing a child restraint system is not
WARNING recommended, although the A/ELR seat-
belt and an upper anchorage (tether
Children should be properly re- anchorage) are provided in this position.
strained at all times. Never allow a Some types of child restraints might not be
child to stand up, or to kneel on any able to be secured firmly due to projection
seat. Unrestrained children will be of the seat cushion.
thrown forward during sudden stop In this seating position, you should use
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-25
only a child restraint system that has a cording to accident statistics, chil- & Choosing a child restraint
bottom base that fits snugly against the dren are safer when properly re- system
contours of the seat cushion and can be strained in the rear seating posi-
securely retained using the seatbelt. tions than in the front seating posi-
If it is unavoidable to install a child tions.
restraint system in the rear seat’s center
seating position, lower the center head
restraint to the lowest position and install
the child restraint system by correctly
passing the rear center seatbelt through
the belt guide.
WARNING
Put children aged 12 and under in
the rear seat properly restrained at
all times. The SRS airbag deploys Choose a child restraint system that is
with considerable speed and force appropriate for the child’s age and size
and can injure or even kill children, (weight and height) in order to provide the
especially if they are 12 years of age child with proper protection. The child
and under and are not restrained or WARNING restraint system should meet all applic-
improperly restrained. Because chil- able requirements of Federal Motor Vehi-
dren are lighter and weaker than SINCE YOUR VEHICLE IS cle Safety Standards for the United States
adults, their risk of being injured EQUIPPED WITH A PASSENGER’S or of Canada Motor Vehicle Safety Stan-
from deployment is greater. SRS AIRBAG, NEVER INSTALL A dards for Canada. It can be identified by
For that reason, be sure to secure R E A R WA R D F A C I N G C H I L D looking for the label on the child restraint
ALL types of child restraint devices SAFETY SEAT IN THE FRONT PAS- system or the manufacturer’s statement of
(including forward facing child SENGER’S SEAT. DOING SO RISKS compliance in the document attached to
seats) in the REAR seats at all times. SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH TO the system.
You should choose a restraint de- THE CHILD BY PLACING THE Also it is important for you to make sure
vice which is appropriate for the CHILD’S HEAD TOO CLOSE TO that the child restraint system is compa-
child’s age, height and weight. Ac- THE SRS AIRBAG. tible with the vehicle in which it will be
used.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
– CONTINUED –
1-26 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
& Installing child restraint sys- child suffering personal injury in the
tems with A/ELR seatbelt event of an accident may be in-
creased.
WARNING
! Installing a rearward facing child
. Child restraint systems and seat- restraint
belts can become hot in a vehicle
that has been closed up in sunny
weather; they could burn a small
child. Check the child restraint
system before you place a child
in it.
. Do not leave an unsecured child
restraint system in your vehicle. 4. Take up the slack in the lap belt.
Unsecured child restraint sys- 5. Pull out the seatbelt fully from the
tems can be thrown around in- retractor to change the retractor over from
side of the vehicle in a sudden the Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR)
stop, turn or accident; they can to the Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
strike and injure vehicle occu- function. Then, allow the belt to rewind
pants as well as result in serious into the retractor. As the belt is rewinding,
injuries or death to the child. 1. Place the child restraint system in the clicks will be heard which indicate the
rear seating position. retractor functions as ALR.
2. Run the lap and shoulder belt through
CAUTION or around the child restraint system
following the instructions provided by its
When you install a child restraint manufacturer.
system, follow the manufacturer’s 3. Insert the tongue plate into the buckle
instructions supplied with it. After until you hear a click.
installing the child restraint system,
check to ensure that it is held
securely in position. If it is not held
tight and secure, the danger of your
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-27
NOTE
When the child restraint system is no
longer in use, remove it and restore the
ELR function of the retractor. That
function is restored by allowing the
seatbelt to retract fully.
! Installing forward facing child re-
straint
6. Push and pull the child restraint 8. To remove the child restraint system,
system forward and from side to side to press the release button on the seatbelt
check if it is firmly secured. Sometimes a buckle and allow the belt to retract
child restraint can be more firmly secured completely. The belt will return to the
by pushing it down into the seat cushion ELR mode.
and then tightening the seatbelt.
7. Pull at the shoulder portion of the belt WARNING
to confirm that it cannot be pulled out (ALR
properly functioning). NEVER INSTALL A REARWARD FA-
CING CHILD SEAT IN THE FRONT 1. Place the child restraint system in the
PASSENGER’S SEAT. DOING SO rear seating position.
RISKS SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH 2. Run the lap and shoulder belt through
TO THE CHILD BY PLACING THE or around the child restraint system
CHILD’S HEAD TOO CLOSE TO THE following the instructions provided by its
SRS AIRBAG. manufacturer.
3. Insert the tongue plate into the buckle
until you hear a click.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
– CONTINUED –
1-28 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
4. Take up the slack in the lap belt. 6. Before having a child sit in the child 8. If the child restraint system requires a
5. Pull out the seatbelt fully from the restraint system, move it back and forth top tether, latch the hook onto the top
retractor to change the retractor over from and right and left to check if it is firmly tether anchorage and tighten the top
the Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) secured. Sometimes a child restraint can tether. For additional instructions, refer to
to the Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) be more firmly secured by pushing it down “Top tether anchorages” F1-33.
function. Then, allow the belt to rewind into the seat cushion and then tightening
into the retractor. As the belt is rewinding, the seatbelt.
clicks will be heard which indicate the 7. Pull at the shoulder portion of the belt
retractor functions as ALR. to confirm that it cannot be pulled out (ALR
properly functioning).
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-29
9. To remove the child restraint system, injuries or death to the child. seat.
press the release button on the seatbelt 2. Run the lap and shoulder belt through
buckle and allow the belt to retract or around the booster seat and the child
completely. The belt will return to the CAUTION following the instructions provided by its
ELR mode. manufacturer.
When you install a child restraint
3. Insert the tongue plate into the buckle
system, follow the manufacturer’s
NOTE instructions supplied with it. After
until you hear a click. Take care not to
When the child restraint system is no twist the seatbelt.
installing the child restraint system,
longer in use, remove it and restore the check to ensure that it is held Make sure the shoulder belt is positioned
ELR function of the retractor. That securely in position. If it is not held across the center of child’s shoulder and
function is restored by allowing the tight and secure, the danger of your that the lap belt is positioned as low as
seatbelt to retract fully. child suffering personal injury in the possible on the child’s hips.
event of an accident may be in-
& Installing a booster seat creased.
WARNING
. Child restraint systems and seat-
belts can become hot in a vehicle
that has been closed up in sunny
weather; they could burn a small
child. Check the child restraint
system before you place a child
in it.
. Do not leave an unsecured child
restraint system in your vehicle. 4. To remove the booster seat, press the
Unsecured child restraint sys- release button on the seatbelt buckle and
tems can be thrown around in- allow the belt to retract.
side of the vehicle in a sudden
1. Place the booster seat in the rear
stop, turn or accident; they can
seating position and sit the child on it. The
strike and injure vehicle occu-
child should sit well back on the booster
pants as well as result in serious
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
– CONTINUED –
1-30 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
WARNING & Installation of child restraint tight and secure, the danger of your
systems by use of lower and child suffering personal injury in the
. Never use a belt that is twisted or tether anchorages (LATCH) event of an accident may be in-
reversed. In an accident, this can creased.
increase the risk or severity of WARNING
injury to the child. Some types of child restraint systems can
. Never place the shoulder belt . Child restraint systems and seat- be installed on the rear seat of your
under the child’s arm or behind belts can become hot in a vehicle vehicle without use of the seatbelts. Such
the child’s back. If an accident that has been closed up in sunny child restraint systems are secured to the
occurs, this can increase the risk weather; they could burn a small designated anchorages provided on the
or severity of injury to the child. child. Check the child restraint vehicle body. The lower and tether an-
system before you place a child chorages are sometimes referred to as the
. The seatbelt should fit snugly in LATCH system (Lower Anchors and
in it.
order to provide full restraint. Tethers for CHildren).
Loose fitting belts are not as . Do not leave an unsecured child
effective in preventing or redu- restraint system in your vehicle.
cing injury. Unsecured child restraint sys-
tems can be thrown around in-
. Place the lap belt as low as
side of the vehicle in a sudden
possible on the child’s hips. A
stop, turn or accident; they can
high-positioned lap belt will in-
strike and injure vehicle occu-
crease the risk of sliding under
pants as well as result in serious
the lap belt and of the lap belt
injuries or death to the child.
sliding up over the abdomen, and
both can result in serious inter-
nal injury or death. CAUTION
. Make sure the shoulder belt is
positioned across the center of When you install a child restraint
child’s shoulder. Placing the system, follow the manufacturer’s
shoulder belt over the neck may instructions supplied with it. After
result in neck injury during sud- installing the child restraint system,
den braking or in a collision. check to ensure that it is held
securely in position. If it is not held
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-31
3. [If your child restraint system is of a 5. Before seating a child in the child
flexible attachment type (which uses restraint system, try to move seat back
tether belts to connect the child restraint and forth and right and left to verify that it
system properly to the lower anchorages)] is held securely in position.
While pushing the child restraint into the 6. To remove the child restraint system,
seat cushion, pull both left and right lower follow the reverse procedures of installa-
2. While following the instructions sup-
tether belts up to secure the child restraint tion.
plied by the child restraint system manu-
system firmly by taking up the slack in the
facturer, connect the lower hooks onto the If you have any question concerning this
belt.
lower anchorages located at “ ” marks on type of child restraint system, ask your
the bottom of the rear seatback. When the 4. Connect the top tether hook to the
SUBARU dealer.
hooks are connected, make sure the tether anchorage and firmly tighten the
adjacent seatbelts are not caught. tether. For information on how to set the
top tether, refer to “Top tether anchorages”
F1-33.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-33
senger, and window-side rear passen- concerning the seatbelt system, needs enough space for deploy-
gers) refer to “Seatbelts” F1-11. ment, the driver should always
. Do not sit or lean unnecessarily sit upright and well back in the
These SRS airbags are designed only seat as far from the steering
as a supplement to the primary protec- close to the SRS airbag. Because
the SRS airbag deploys with wheel as practical while still
tion provided by the seatbelt. maintaining full vehicle control
considerable speed – faster than
The system also controls front seatbelt and the front passenger should
the blink of an eye – and force to
pretensioners. For operation instructions move the seat as far back as
protect in high speed collisions,
and precautions concerning the seatbelt possible and sit upright and well
the force of an airbag can injure
pretensioner, refer to “Front seatbelt pre- back in the seat.
an occupant whose body is too
tensioners” F1-20.
close to SRS airbag. . Do not place any objects over or
WARNING It is also important to wear your near the SRS airbag cover or
seatbelt to help avoid injuries between you and the SRS airbag.
. To obtain maximum protection in that can result when the SRS If the SRS airbag deploys, those
the event of an accident, the airbag contacts an occupant not objects could interfere with its
driver and all passengers in the in proper position such as one proper operation and could be
vehicle should always wear seat- thrown forward during pre-acci- propelled inside the vehicle and
belts when the vehicle is moving. dent braking. cause injury.
The SRS airbag is designed only Even when properly positioned,
as a supplement to the primary there remains a possibility that
protection provided by the seat- an occupant may suffer minor
belt. It does not do away with the injury such as abrasions and
need to fasten seatbelts. In com- bruises to the face or arms
bination with the seatbelts, it because of the SRS airbag de-
offers the best combined protec- ployment force.
tion in case of a serious accident.
. The SRS airbags deploy with
Not wearing a seatbelt increases considerable speed and force.
the chance of severe injury or Occupants who are out of proper
death in a crash even when the position when the SRS airbag
vehicle has the SRS airbag. deploys could suffer very serious
For instructions and precautions injuries. Because the SRS airbag
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
– CONTINUED –
1-36 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
1) Airbag control module (including impact 5) Front sub sensor (right-hand side)
and rollover sensors) 6) Side airbag module (driver’s side)
2) Frontal airbag module (driver’s side) 7) Side airbag module (front passenger’s
3) Frontal airbag module (front passenger’s side)
side) 8) Side airbag sensor (center pillar left-hand
4) Front sub sensor (left-hand side) side)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
– CONTINUED –
1-38 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
WARNING WARNING
Never hold a child on your lap or in The SRS airbag deploys with con-
your arms. The SRS airbag deploys siderable speed and force. Occu-
with considerable force and can pants who are out of proper position
injure or even kill the child. when the SRS airbag deploys could
suffer very serious injuries. Be-
cause the SRS airbag needs enough WARNING
space for deployment, the driver
should always sit upright and well Do not put any objects over the
back in the seat as far from the steering wheel pad and dashboard.
steering wheel as practical while If the SRS frontal airbag deploys,
still maintaining full vehicle control those objects could interfere with its
and the front passenger should proper operation and could be pro-
move the seat as far back as pelled inside the vehicle and cause
possible and sit upright and well injury.
back in the seat.
It is also important to wear your
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
– CONTINUED –
1-40 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
have failed, the SRS airbag system ! Passenger’s frontal airbag ON and status of the front passenger’s SRS frontal
warning light will illuminate. Have the OFF indicators airbag determined by the SUBARU ad-
system inspected by your SUBARU deal- vanced frontal airbag system monitoring.
er immediately if the SRS airbag system If the front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag
warning light illuminates. is activated, the passenger’s frontal airbag
If your vehicle has sustained impact, this ON indicator will illuminate while the OFF
may affect the proper function of the indicator will remain off.
SUBARU advanced frontal airbag system. If the front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag
Have your vehicle inspected at your is deactivated, the passenger’s frontal
SUBARU dealer. airbag ON indicator will remain off while
the OFF indicator will illuminate.
NOTE With the ignition switch turned to the “ON”
The front passenger’s SRS side airbag, position, if both the ON and OFF indica-
SRS curtain airbag and seatbelt pre- tors remain illuminated or off simulta-
tensioner are not controlled by the neously even after the system check
SUBARU advanced frontal airbag sys- ON or : Front passenger’s frontal airbag period, the system is faulty. Contact your
tem. ON indicator SUBARU dealer immediately for an in-
or : Front passenger’s frontal airbag spection.
OFF indicator
! Conditions in which front passen-
The front passenger’s frontal airbag ON ger’s SRS frontal airbag is not
and OFF indicators show you the status of activated
the front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag.
The front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag
The indicators are located next to the will not be activated when any of the
clock in the center portion of the dash- following conditions are met regarding the
board. front passenger’s seat:
When the ignition switch is turned to the . The seat is empty.
“ON” position, both the ON and OFF
. The seat is equipped with a rearward
indicators illuminate for 6 seconds during
facing child restraint system and an infant
which time the system is checked. Follow-
is restrained with it. (See WARNING that
ing the system check, both indicators turn
follows.)
off for 2 seconds. After that, one of the
indicators illuminates depending on the . The seat is equipped with a forward
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
– CONTINUED –
1-42 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
facing child restraint system and a small passenger’s seat may be killed or ! If the front passenger’s frontal air-
child is restrained with it. (See WARNING severely injured should the front bag ON indicator illuminates and the
that follows.) passenger’s SRS frontal airbag de- OFF indicator turns off even when
. The seat is equipped with a booster ploy. REAR seats are the safest an infant or a small child is in a child
seat and a small child is in the booster place for children. restraint system (including booster
seat. (See WARNING that follows.) seat)
. The seat is relieved of the occupant When the front passenger’s seat is occu- Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK”
load for a time exceeding the predeter- pied by a child, observe the following position if the front passenger’s frontal
mined monitoring time period. precautions. Failure to do so may increase airbag ON indicator illuminates and the
. The seat is occupied by a child who the load on the front passenger’s seat, OFF indicator turns off even when an
has outgrown a child restraint system or activating the front passenger’s SRS infant or a small child is in a child restraint
by a small adult. (See WARNING that frontal airbag even though that seat is system (including booster seat). Remove
follows.) occupied by a child. the child restraint system from the seat. By
. The front passenger’s occupant detec- . Do not place any article on the seat referring to the child restraint manufac-
tion system is faulty. other than the child occupant and a child turer’s recommendations as well as the
restraint system. child restraint system installation proce-
WARNING . Do not place more than one child on dures in “Child restraint systems” F1-23,
the seat. correctly install the child restraint system.
NEVER INSTALL A REARWARD FA- . Do not install any accessory such as a Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”
CING CHILD SEAT IN THE FRONT table or TV onto the seatback. position and make sure that the front
PASSENGER’S SEAT EVEN IF THE . Do not store a heavy load in the passenger’s frontal airbag ON indicator
FRONT PASSENGER’S SRS FRON- seatback pocket. turns off and the OFF indicator illuminates.
TAL AIRBAG IS DEACTIVATED. Be
. Do not allow the rear seat occupant to If the ON indicator still remains illuminated
sure to install it in the REAR seat in
place his/her hands or legs on the front while the OFF indicator turns off, take the
a correct manner. Also, it is strongly
passenger’s seatback, or allow him/her to following actions.
recommended that any forward fa-
pull the seatback. . Ensure that no article is placed on the
cing child seat or booster seat be
installed in the REAR seat, and that seat other than the child restraint system
even children who have outgrown a and the child occupant.
child restraint system be also . Ensure that there is no article left in the
seated in the REAR seat. This is seatback pocket.
because children sitting in the front . Ensure that the backward-forward po-
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-43
sition and seatback of front passenger’s above have been taken, seat the child/ lift the front passenger’s seat cushion
seat are locked into place securely by small adult in the rear seat and im- using his/her feet.
moving the seat back and forth. mediately contact your SUBARU dealer . Do not place any article under the front
for an inspection. Even if the system passenger’s seat, or squeeze any article
If the ON indicator still remains illuminated has passed the dealer inspection, it is from behind and under the seat. This may
while the OFF indicator turns off after recommended that on subsequent trips lift the seat cushion.
taking relevant corrective actions de- the child/small adult always take the
scribed above, relocate the child restraint . Do not squeeze any article between
rear seat. the front passenger’s seat and side trim/
system to the rear seat and immediately
contact your SUBARU dealer for an Children who have outgrown a child pillar, door or center console box. This
inspection. restraint system should always wear the may lift the seat cushion.
seatbelt irrespective of whether the airbag
NOTE is deactivated or activated. ! If the passenger’s frontal airbag OFF
When a child who has outgrown a child ! Conditions in which front passen- indicator illuminates and the ON
restraint system or a small adult is ger’s SRS frontal airbag is activated indicator turns off even when the
seated in the front passenger’s seat, front passenger’s seat is occupied
The front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag by an adult
the SUBARU advanced frontal airbag will be activated for deployment upon
system may or may not activate the impact when any of the following condi- This can be caused by the adult incor-
front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag tions are met regarding the front passen- rectly sitting in the front passenger’s seat.
depending on the occupant’s seating ger’s seat. Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK”
posture. If the front passenger’s SRS position. Ask the front passenger to set
. When the seat is occupied by an adult. the seatback to the upright position, sit up
frontal airbag is activated (the ON
indicator remains illuminated while . When a heavy article is placed on the straight in the center of the seat cushion,
the OFF indicator turns off), take the seat. correctly fasten the seatbelt, position his/
following actions. When the front passenger’s seat is occu- her legs out forward, and adjust the seat to
. Ensure that no article is placed on pied by an adult, observe the following the rearmost position. Turn the ignition
the seat other than the occupant. precautions. Failure to do so may lessen switch to the “ON” position. If the OFF
. Ensure that there is no article left in the load on the front passenger’s seat, indicator remains illuminated while the ON
the seatback pocket. deactivating the front passenger’s SRS indicator remains off, take the following
frontal airbag despite the fact that the seat actions.
If the ON indicator still remains illumi-
is occupied by an adult. . Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK”
nates while the OFF indicator turns off position.
despite the fact that the actions noted . Do not allow the rear seat occupant to
. Ensure that there are no articles,
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
– CONTINUED –
1-44 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
books, shoes, or other objects trapped the following SUBARU distributors. you bought your vehicle.
under the seat, at the rear of the seat, or
on the side of the seat. <Continental U.S., Alaska and the District
of Columbia>
. Ensure that the backward-forward po-
sition and seatback of front passenger’s Subaru of America, Inc.
seat are locked into place securely by Customer Dealer Services Department
moving the seat back and forth. P.O. Box 6000
. Next, turn the ignition switch to the Cherry Hill, NJ 08034-6000
“ON” position and wait 6 seconds to allow 1-800-SUBARU3 (1-800-782-2783)
the system to complete self-checking.
Following the system check, both indica- <Hawaii>
tors turn off for 2 seconds. Now, the ON Servco Subaru Inc., dba Subaru Hawaii
indicator should illuminate while the OFF 2850 Pukoloa Street, Suite 202, Honolulu,
indicator remains off. HI 96819
808-839-2273
If the OFF indicator still remains illumi-
nated while the ON indicator remains off, <Guam>
ask the occupant to move to the rear seat Shen’s Corporation dba Prestige Automo-
and immediately contact your SUBARU bile
dealer for an inspection. 491, East Marine Drive, Route 1 Dededo,
! Effect vehicle modifications made Guam
for persons with disabilities may 671-633-2698
have on SUBARU advanced frontal
airbag system operation (U.S. only) <Puerto Rico>
Trebol Motors
Changing or moving any parts of the front
seats, rear seat, seatbelts, front bumper, P.O. Box 11204, San Juan, Puerto Rico
front side frame, radiator panel, instrument 00910
panel, combination meter, steering wheel, 787-793-2828
steering column, tire, suspension or floor There are currently no SUBARU distribu-
panel can affect the operation of the tors in any other U.S. territories. If you are
SUBARU advanced airbag system. If in such an area, please contact the
you have any questions, you may contact SUBARU distributor or dealer from which
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-45
A) Driver’s side
B) Passenger’s side
1) SRS AIRBAGs deploy as soon as a collision occurs.
2) After deployment, SRS AIRBAGs start to deflate immediately so that the driver’s vision is not
obstructed.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
– CONTINUED –
1-46 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
The two inflators of each airbag are CAUTION the visible damage done to the vehicle
triggered either sequentially or simulta- itself.
neously, depending on the severity of Do not touch the SRS airbag system
impact, in the case of the driver’s SRS ! Example of accident in which the
components around the steering driver’s/driver’s and front passen-
frontal airbag and depending on the wheel and dashboard with bare
severity of impact and the total load on ger’s SRS frontal airbag(s) will most
hands right after deployment. Doing likely deploy.
the seat in the case of the front passen- so can cause burns because the
ger’s SRS frontal airbag. After deploy- components can be very hot as a
ment, the SRS airbag immediately starts result of deployment.
to deflate so that the driver’s vision is not
obstructed. The time required from detect- The driver’s SRS frontal airbag and front
ing impact to the deflation of the SRS passenger’s SRS frontal airbag are de-
airbag after deployment is shorter than the signed to deploy in the event of an
blink of an eye. accident involving a moderate to severe
Both when only the driver’s SRS frontal frontal collision. It is basically not designed
airbag deploys and the driver’s and front to deploy in lesser frontal impacts be-
passenger’s SRS frontal airbags deploy, cause the necessary protection can be
the driver’s and front passenger’s seatbelt achieved by the seatbelt alone. Also, they
pretensioners operate at the same time. are basically not designed to deploy in
side or rear impacts or in roll-over acci-
Although it is highly unlikely that the SRS dents because deployment of only the A head-on collision against a thick con-
airbag would activate in a non-accident driver’s SRS frontal airbag or both driver’s crete wall at a vehicle speed of 12 to 19
situation, should it occur, the SRS airbag and front passenger’s SRS frontal airbags mph (20 to 30 km/h) or higher activates
will deflate quickly, not obscuring vision would not help the occupant in those only the driver’s SRS frontal airbag or both
and will not interfere with the driver’s situations. The driver’s and front passen- driver’s and front passenger’s SRS frontal
ability to maintain control of the vehicle. ger’s SRS frontal airbags are designed to airbags. The airbag(s) will also be acti-
function on a one-time-only basis. vated when the vehicle is exposed to a
When the SRS airbag deploys, a sudden, frontal impact similar in fashion and
fairly loud inflation noise will be heard and SRS airbag deployment depends on the magnitude to the collision described
some smoke will be released. These level of force experienced in the passen- above.
occurrences are a normal result of the ger compartment during a collision. That
deployment. This smoke does not indicate level differs from one type of collision to
a fire in the vehicle. another, and it may have no bearing on
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-47
! Examples of the types of accidents Only the driver’s SRS frontal airbag or
in which it is possible that the both driver’s and front passenger’s SRS
driver’s/driver’s and front passen- frontal airbags may be activated when the
ger’s SRS frontal airbag(s) will de- vehicle sustains a hard impact in the
ploy. undercarriage area from the road surface
(such as when the vehicle plunges into a
deep ditch, is severely impacted or
knocked hard against an obstacle on the
road such as a curb).
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
– CONTINUED –
1-48 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
! Examples of the types of accidents in which deployment of the driver’s/driver’s 1) The vehicle strikes an object, such as a
telephone pole or sign pole.
and front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag(s) is unlikely to occur. 2) The vehicle slides under the load bed of
a truck.
3) The vehicle sustains an oblique offset
frontal impact.
4) The vehicle sustains an offset frontal
collision.
There are many types of collisions which
might not necessarily require deployment
of driver’s/driver’s and front passenger’s
SRS frontal airbag(s). In the event of
accidents like those illustrated, the dri-
ver’s/driver’s and front passenger’s SRS
frontal airbag(s) may not deploy depend-
ing on the level of accident forces in-
volved.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-49
! Examples of the types of accidents to deploy if the vehicle is struck from the & SRS side airbag and SRS
in which the driver’s/driver’s and side or from behind, or if it rolls onto its
side or roof, or if it is involved in a low-
curtain airbag
front passenger’s SRS frontal
airbag(s) will basically not deploy. speed frontal collision. The SRS side airbag is stored in the door
side of each front seat seatback, which
bears an “SRS AIRBAG” label.
In a moderate to severe side impact
collision, the SRS side airbag on the
impacted side of the vehicle deploys
between the occupant and the door panel
and supplements the seatbelt by reducing
the impact on the occupant’s chest and
waist. The SRS side airbag operates only
for front seat occupants.
The SRS curtain airbag on each side of
the cabin is stored in the roof side
(between the front pillar and a point over
1) First impact the rear seat). An “SRS AIRBAG” mark is
2) Second impact located at the top of each center pillar.
In an accident where the vehicle is In a moderate to severe side impact
impacted more than once, the driver’s collision, the SRS curtain airbag on the
and/or front passenger’s SRS frontal impacted side of the vehicle deploys
airbag(s) will deploy only once on the first between the occupant and the side
impact. window and supplements the seatbelt by
reducing the impact on the occupant’s
Example: In the case of a double collision, head.
first with another vehicle, then against a In a rollover, SRS curtain airbags on both
concrete wall in immediate succession, sides of the vehicle deploy between the
once either or both of the driver’s and front occupant and the side window and sup-
passenger’s SRS frontal airbags is/are plement the seatbelt by reducing the
The driver’s and front passenger’s SRS activated on the first impact, it/they will not impact to the occupant’s head.
frontal airbags are designed basically not be activated on the second impact.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
– CONTINUED –
1-50 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
WARNING
. Never allow a child to kneel on
the front passenger’s seat facing
the side window or to wrap his/
her arms around the front seat
seatback. In the event of an
accident, the force of the SRS
side airbag deployment could
injure the child seriously be-
cause his/her head or arms or
other parts of the body are too
close to the SRS side airbag.
Since your vehicle is also WARNING
equipped with a front passen-
ger’s SRS frontal airbag, children . Do not attach accessories to the
aged 12 and under should be door trim or near either SRS side
placed in the rear seat anyway airbags and do not place objects
and should be properly re- near the SRS side airbags. In the
strained at all times. event of the SRS side airbag
. Never allow a child to kneel on deployment, they could be pro-
any passenger’s seat facing the pelled dangerously toward the
side window or put their head, vehicle’s occupants and cause
arms and hands out of the win- injuries.
dow. In the event of an accident, . Do not attach a hands-free micro-
the force of the SRS curtain phone or any other accessory to
airbag deployment could injure a front pillar, a center pillar, a rear
the child seriously because his/ pillar, the windshield, a side win-
her head is close to the SRS dow, an assist grip, or any other
curtain airbag. cabin surface that would be near
a deploying SRS curtain airbag.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
– CONTINUED –
1-52 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
vehicle, the control module inflates the After deployment, do not touch any and inclination at the time of the rollover.
curtain airbags. After the deployment, the part of the SRS curtain airbag
SRS side airbag immediately starts to ! Example of the type of accident in
system (from the front pillar to the
deflate. The time required from detection which the SRS side airbag will most
part of the roof side over the rear
of an impact to deflation of an SRS side likely deploy.
seat). Doing so can cause burns
airbag after deployment is shorter than the because the components can be
blink of an eye. very hot as a result of deployment.
The SRS curtain airbags remain inflated
for a while following deployment then The SRS side airbag and SRS curtain
slowly deflates. airbags are designed to deploy in the
event of an accident involving a moderate
The SRS side airbag and SRS curtain to severe side impact collision. Also, in the
airbags deploy even when no one occu- case of a rollover, the SRS curtain airbags
pies the seat on the side on which an deploy. They are basically not designed to
impact is applied. deploy in a lesser side impact. Also, they
When the SRS side airbag and SRS are basically not designed to deploy in
curtain airbags deploy, a sudden, fairly frontal or rear impacts because SRS side
loud inflation noise will be heard and some airbag and SRS curtain airbag deploy-
smoke will be released. These occur- ment would not help the occupant in those A severe side impact near the front seat
rences are a normal result of the deploy- situations. activates the SRS side airbag and SRS
ment. This smoke does not indicate a fire Each SRS side airbag and SRS curtain curtain airbag.
in the vehicle. airbags are designed to function on a one-
time-only basis.
CAUTION
SRS side airbag and SRS curtain airbag
Do not touch the SRS side airbag deployment depend on the level of force
system components around the experienced in the passenger compart-
front seat seatback with bare hands ment during a side impact collision. That
right after deployment. Doing so can level differs from one type of collision to
cause burns because the compo- another, and it may have no bearing on
nents can be very hot as a result of the visible damage done to the vehicle
deployment. itself. Also, the SRS curtain airbags
deploy depending on the vehicle’s position
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
– CONTINUED –
1-54 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
! Examples of the types of accidents in which the SRS curtain airbag will most 1) A severe side impact near the front seat
or the rear seat activates the SRS curtain
likely deploy. airbag.
2) The vehicle rolls onto its side or the roof.
3) If the angle of vehicle tip-up is marginal
or if the skidding vehicle’s tires hit a
curbstone laterally.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-55
! Examples of the types of accidents in which it is possible that the SRS side 1) Hitting a curb, edge of pavement or hard
surface
airbag and the SRS curtain airbag will deploy. 2) Falling into or jumping over a deep hole
3) Landing hard or vehicle falling
It is possible that the SRS side and curtain
airbags will deploy if a serious impact
occurs to the underside of your vehicle.
Some examples are shown in the illustra-
tion.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
– CONTINUED –
1-56 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
! Examples of the types of accidents in which the SRS side airbag is unlikely to 1) The vehicle is involved in an oblique
side-on impact.
deploy. 2) The vehicle is involved in a side-on
impact in an area outside the vicinity of
the passenger compartment.
3) The vehicle strikes a telephone pole or
similar object.
4) The vehicle is involved in a side-on
impact from a motorcycle.
5) The vehicle rolls onto its side or roof.
There are many types of collisions which
might not necessarily require SRS side
airbag deployment. In the event of acci-
dents like those illustrated, the SRS side
airbag may not deploy depending on the
level of accident forces involved.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-57
! Examples of the types of accidents in which the SRS curtain airbag is unlikely 1) The vehicle is involved in an oblique
side-on impact.
to deploy. 2) The vehicle is involved in a side-on
impact in an area outside the vicinity of
the passenger compartment.
3) The vehicle is involved in a side-on
impact from a motorcycle.
There are many types of collisions which
might not necessarily require SRS curtain
airbag deployment. In the event of acci-
dents like those illustrated, the SRS
curtain airbag may not deploy depending
on the level of accident forces involved.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
– CONTINUED –
1-58 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
! Examples of the types of accidents 2) The vehicle is struck from behind. and SRS curtain airbag are activated on
in which the SRS side airbag and The SRS side airbag and SRS curtain the first impact, they will not be activated
SRS curtain airbag will basically not airbag are basically not designed to on the second.
deploy. deploy if the vehicle is involved in a frontal ! Example of the type of accident in
collision or is struck from behind. Exam- which the SRS curtain airbag will
ples of such accidents are illustrated. basically not deploy.
1) First impact
2) Second impact The SRS curtain airbags are not basically
A) SRS curtain airbag designed to deploy if the vehicle pitches
B) SRS side airbag end over end.
In an accident where the vehicle is struck
from the side more than once, the SRS
side airbag and SRS curtain airbag deploy
only once on the first impact.
Example: In the case of a double side
impact collision, first with one vehicle and
1) The vehicle is involved in frontal collision immediately followed by another from the
with another vehicle (moving or station- same direction, once the SRS side airbag
ary).
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-59
cle damaged by a collision, con- . Top of the dashboard on front the front pillar to a point over the rear
sult your SUBARU dealer. passenger’s side and nearby seat) is scratched, cracked, or other-
. The SRS airbag has no user- areas wise damaged.
serviceable parts. Do not use . Each front seat and nearby area . Center pillar, rear wheel house or
electrical test equipment on any rear sub frame, or an area near these
. Inside each center pillar parts, was involved in an accident in
circuit related to the SRS airbag
system. For required servicing of . In each roof side (from the front which the SRS side airbag and SRS
the SRS airbag, consult your pillar to a point over the rear seat) curtain airbag did not deploy.
nearest SUBARU dealer. Tamper- . Between the rear seat cushion . The fabric or leather of either front
ing with or disconnecting the and rear wheel house on each seatback is cut, frayed, or otherwise
system’s wiring could result in side damaged.
. The rear part of the vehicle was
accidental inflation of the SRS . Under the rear center seat
airbag or could make the system involved in an accident in which no
inoperative, which may result in SRS airbag was deployed.
In the event that the SRS airbag is
serious injury. deployed, replacement of the system
should be performed only by an author- & Precautions against vehicle
ized SUBARU dealer. When the compo- modification
CAUTION nents of the SRS airbag system are
replaced, use only genuine SUBARU WARNING
If you need service or repair in areas
parts.
indicated in the following list, have To avoid accidental activation of the
the work performed by an author- NOTE system or rendering the system
ized SUBARU dealer. The SRS air- In the following cases, contact your inoperative, which may result in
bag control module, impact sensors SUBARU dealer as soon as possible. serious injury, no modifications
and airbag modules are stored in
these areas. . The front part of the vehicle was should be made to any components
involved in an accident in which only or wiring of the SRS airbag system.
. Under the center console the driver’s SRS frontal airbag or both This includes following modifica-
. On both the right and left sides at driver’s and front passenger’s SRS tions:
the front of the vehicle frontal airbags did not deploy.
. Installation of custom steering
. Steering wheel and column and . The pad of the steering wheel, the
wheels
nearby areas cover over the front passenger’s SRS
frontal airbag, or either roof side (from . Attachment of additional trim
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-61
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Keys and doors
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
2-2 Keys and doors
device may not cause harmful inter- . Do not get the key wet. If the key & Security indicator light
ference, and (2) this device must gets wet, wipe it dry with a cloth
accept any interference received, in- immediately.
cluding interference that may cause
undesired operation.
Changes or modifications not ex- & Security ID plate
pressly approved by the party respon-
sible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equip-
ment.
NOTE
To protect your vehicle from theft,
please pay close attention to the fol-
lowing security precautions:
. Never leave your vehicle unattended
with its keys inside. The security indicator light deters potential
. Before leaving your vehicle, close all thieves by indicating that the vehicle is
windows and lock the doors and rear equipped with an immobilizer system. It
gate. 1) Key number plate
begins flashing (approximately once every
. Do not leave spare keys or any 2) Security ID plate 3 seconds) approximately 60 seconds
record of your key number in the after the ignition switch is turned from the
vehicle. The security ID is stamped on the security “ON” position to the “Acc” or “LOCK”
ID plate attached to the key set. Write position or immediately after the key is
down the security ID and keep it in pulled out.
CAUTION another safe place, not in the vehicle. If the security indicator light does not flash,
. Do not place the key under direct This number is needed to make a replace- the immobilizer system may be faulty. If
sunlight or anywhere it may ment key if you lose your key or lock it this occurs, contact your SUBARU dealer
become hot. inside the vehicle. as soon as possible.
This number is also needed for replace-
ment or repair of the engine control unit, In case an unauthorized key is used (e.g.
integrated unit, and combination meter. an imitation key), the security indicator
light illuminates.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
– CONTINUED –
2-4 Keys and doors
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Keys and doors 2-5
doors from the outside using the power NOTE Remote keyless entry system
door locking switches. When leaving the vehicle, make sure
you are holding the key before locking
& Key lock-in prevention func- the doors. CAUTION
tion . Do not expose the remote trans-
This function prevents the doors from mitter to severe shocks, such as
being locked with the key still in the those experienced as a result of
ignition switch. dropping or throwing.
! Behavior with key lock-in preven- . Do not take the remote transmit-
tion function operational ter apart except when replacing
With the driver’s door open, the doors are the battery.
automatically kept unlocked even if the . Do not get the remote transmitter
door locking switch is pushed to the front wet. If it gets wet, wipe it dry with
(“LOCK”) position. a cloth immediately.
! Behavior with key lock-in preven- . When you carry the remote trans-
tion function non-operational mitter on an airplane, do not
. If the lock lever is turned to the rear press the button of the remote
(“LOCK”) position with the driver’s door transmitter while in the airplane.
open and the driver’s door is then closed When any button of the remote
with the lock lever in that position, the transmitter is pressed, radio
driver’s door is locked. waves are sent and may affect
the operation of the airplane.
. If the spare key is used to lock the When you carry the remote trans-
driver’s door from the outside of the mitter in a bag on an airplane,
vehicle, the door is locked. take measures to prevent the
The setting of this function to operational/ buttons of the remote transmitter
non-operational status can be changed by from being pressed.
a SUBARU dealer. Contact a SUBARU
dealer for details. This device complies with Part 15 of
the FCC Rules and with RSS-210 of
Industry Canada. Operation is subject
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
– CONTINUED –
2-8 Keys and doors
to the following two conditions: (1) This TV tower, or remote controller of home & Locking the doors
device may not cause harmful inter- electronic appliances.
ference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference received, in- The keyless entry system does not oper-
cluding interference that may cause ate when the key is inserted in the ignition
undesired operation. switch.
Changes or modifications not ex-
pressly approved by the party respon-
sible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equip-
ment.
Two transmitters are provided for your
vehicle.
The keyless entry system has the follow- Press the “ ” button to lock all doors and
ing functions. the rear gate. An electronic chirp will
. Locking and unlocking the doors and sound once and the turn signal lights will
rear gate without a key flash once.
. Unlocking the rear gate without a key : Rear gate unlock button If any of the doors or the rear gate is not
. Sounding a panic alarm : Unlock/disarm button fully closed, an electronic chirp will sound
. Arming and disarming the alarm sys- : Lock/arm button five times and the turn signal lights will
tem. For detailed information, refer to A: Panic button flash five times to alert you that the doors
“Alarm system” F2-14. 1) Front or the rear gate are not properly closed.
2) Back When you close the door, it will automa-
The operable distance of the keyless entry tically lock and then an electronic chirp will
system is approximately 30 feet (10 sound once and the turn signal lights will
meters). However, this distance will vary flash once.
depending on environmental conditions.
The system’s operable distance will be
shorter in areas near a facility or electronic
equipment emitting strong radio waves
such as a power plant, broadcast station,
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Keys and doors 2-9
& Unlocking the doors & Unlocking the rear gate nation period setting of the interior light in
accordance with your preference. Contact
the nearest SUBARU dealer for details.
Press the “ ” button to unlock the driver’s Pressing the “ ” button opens the rear
NOTE
door. An electronic chirp will sound twice gate. If the interval between presses is too
and the turn signal lights will flash twice. short when you press the “ ” button
An electronic chirp will sound twice and
To unlock all doors and the rear gate, three times, the system may not re-
the turn signal lights will flash twice.
briefly press the “ ” button a second time spond to the signals from the remote
transmitter.
within 5 seconds. & Illuminated entry
NOTE The interior (dome) light and the map light
If the interval between the first and will illuminate when the “ ” button is
second presses of the “ ” button (for pressed. These lights stay illuminated for
unlocking of all of the doors and the approximately 30 seconds if any of the
rear gate) is extremely short, the sys- doors or the rear gate is not opened.
tem may not respond. If the “ ” button is pressed before 30
seconds have elapsed, these lights will
turn off. The dome light must be set to the
DOOR position in order for this function
to operate.
A SUBARU dealer can change the illumi-
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
– CONTINUED –
2-10 Keys and doors
& Sounding a panic alarm the audible signal off. touch the battery and any re-
Do the following to deactivate the audible moved parts; children could
signal. You can also use the same steps swallow them.
to restore the function. . There is a danger of explosion if
1. Sit in the driver’s seat and shut all an incorrect replacement battery
doors and the rear gate. is used. Replace only with the
2. Hold down the UNLOCK side of the same or equivalent type of bat-
power door locking switch. tery.
3. While holding down the “UNLOCK” . Batteries should not be exposed
side of the power door locking switch, pull to excessive heat such as sun-
the key out and re-insert it into the ignition shine, fire or the like.
switch at least 6 times within 10 seconds
after Step 2. When the transmitter battery begins to get
4. Open and close the driver’s door once weak, transmitter range will begin to
A “PANIC” button is located on the back of within 10 seconds after Step 3. decrease. Replace the battery as soon
the transmitter. 5. The turn signal lights flash 3 times to as possible.
To activate the alarm, press the “PANIC” indicate completion of the setting. To replace the battery:
button once.
The horn will sound and the turn signal You may have the above settings done by
lights will flash. your SUBARU dealer.
To deactivate the panic alarm, press any & Replacing the battery
button on the remote transmitter. Unless a
button on the remote is pressed, the alarm CAUTION
will be deactivated after approximately 30
seconds. . Do not let dust, oil or water get on
or in the transmitter when repla-
& Selecting audible signal op- cing the battery.
eration . Be careful not to damage the
Using an electronic chirp, the system will printed circuit board in the trans-
give you an audible signal when the doors mitter when replacing the battery.
1. Open the transmitter case using a flat-
lock and unlock. If desired, you may turn . Be careful not to allow children to
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Keys and doors 2-11
head screwdriver. CR2025 or equivalent) making sure to Programming transmitter codes into
install the new battery with the negative system:
(−) side facing up.
4. Refit the removed half of the transmit-
ter case.
After the battery is replaced, the trans-
mitter must be synchronized with the
keyless entry system’s control unit.
Press either the “ ” or “ ” button six
times to synchronize the unit.
& Replacing lost transmitters
If you lose a transmitter or want to
purchase additional transmitters (up to
2. Remove the old battery from the four can be programmed), you should re-
holder. Bag containing transmitter
program all of your transmitters for secur-
ity reasons. It is recommended that you
have your dealer program all of your
transmitters into your system.
! Programming the transmitters
The keyless entry system is equipped with
a special code learning feature that allows
you to program new transmitter codes into
the system or to delete old ones. The
system can learn up to four unique
transmitter codes. The four transmitter
codes may be the same or different.
11. Test every registered transmitter to system, allowing them unauthorized Alarm system
confirm correct operation. access to your vehicle.
The alarm system helps to protect your
! Deleting old transmitter codes vehicle and valuables from theft. The horn
The control unit of the keyless entry sounds and the turn signal lights flash if
system has four memory locations to store someone attempts to break into your
transmitter codes, giving it the ability to vehicle. The starter motor is also inter-
operate with up to four transmitters. When rupted to prevent starting the vehicle
you lose a transmitter, the lost transmit- without a key.
ter’s code remains in the memory. For
The system can be armed and disarmed
security reasons, lost transmitter codes
with the remote transmitter.
should be deleted from the memory.
The system does not operate when the
To delete old transmitter codes, program
key is inserted into the ignition switch.
four transmitter codes into the system. If
you have only one current transmitter, Your vehicle’s alarm system has been set
program it four times. If you have two for activation at the time of shipment from
current transmitters, program each one the factory. You can set the system for
twice. If you have three current transmit- deactivation yourself or have it done by
ters, program two of them once and the your SUBARU dealer.
third one twice. This process will leave
only current transmitter codes in the & System operation
system’s memory.
The alarm system will give the following
NOTE alarms when triggered.
Make sure no one else is operating . The vehicle’s horn will sound for 30
their keyless entry system within range seconds.
of your vehicle when programming . The turn signal lights will flash for 30
transmitters. If someone else were to seconds.
operate their remote transmitter while If any of the doors or the rear gate remains
you are programming your transmit- open after the 30-second period, the horn
ters, it is possible that their transmitter will continue to sound for a maximum of 3
code will be programmed into your minutes. If the door or the rear gate is
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Keys and doors 2-15
closed while the horn is sounding, the & Activating and deactivating NOTE
horn will stop sounding with a delay of up the alarm system You may have the above setting
to 30 seconds. change done by your SUBARU dealer.
To change the setting of your vehicle’s
The alarm is triggered by: alarm system for activation or deactiva- & If you have accidentally trig-
. Opening any of the doors or the rear tion, do the following.
gered the alarm system
gate 1. Disarm the alarm system. Refer to
. Physical impact to the vehicle, such as “Disarming the system” F2-17. ! To stop the alarm
forced entry (only vehicles with shock 2. Sit in the driver’s seat and shut all Do any of the following operations:
sensors (dealer option)) doors and the rear gate. . Press any button on the remote trans-
3. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON” mitter.
NOTE position. . Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”
The alarm system can be set to trigger 4. Hold down the UNLOCK side of the position.
the illumination of the following interior driver’s power door locking switch, open
lights.
. Dome light (illuminates only when
the driver’s door within the following 1 & Arming the system
second, and wait 10 seconds without
the dome light switch is in the “DOOR” releasing the switch. The setting will then ! To arm the system using remote
position) be changed as follows. transmitter
. Map lights (illuminate only when the
door interlock switch is in the “DOOR” If the system was previously activated: 1. Close all windows and the moonroof (if
position) The odometer/trip meter screen displays equipped).
“AL oF” and the horn sounds twice, 2. Remove the key from the ignition
The notifications regarding the dome indicating that the system is now deacti- switch.
light and the map lights are deactivated vated. 3. Open the doors and get out of the
as the factory setting. A SUBARU vehicle.
dealer can activate the system. Contact If the system was previously deacti-
4. Make sure that the engine hood is
your SUBARU dealer for details. vated:
locked.
The odometer/trip meter screen displays
5. Close all doors and the rear gate.
“AL on” and the horn sounds once,
indicating that the system is now acti-
vated.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
– CONTINUED –
2-16 Keys and doors
. The 30-second standby time can be NOTE your vehicle’s alarm system for activation
eliminated if you prefer. Have it per- After disarming the alarm system, mode. Refer to “Activating and deactivat-
formed by your SUBARU dealer. briefly press the “ ” button a second ing the alarm system” F2-15.
. The system is in the standby mode time within 5 seconds to unlock all
for a 30-second period after locking the other doors and the rear gate. & Passive arming
doors with the remote transmitter. The When passive arming mode has been
security indicator light will flash at ! Emergency disarming
programmed by the dealer, arming of the
short intervals during this period. If you cannot disarm the system using the system is automatically accomplished
. If any of the following actions are transmitter (i.e. the transmitter is lost, without using the remote transmitter. Note
done during the standby period, the broken or the transmitter battery is too that in this mode, DOORS MUST BE
system will not switch to the surveil- weak), you can disarm the system without MANUALLY LOCKED.
lance state. using the transmitter as follows.
– Doors are unlocked using the . Turn the ignition switch from the ! To enter the passive mode
remote transmitter. “LOCK” to the “ON” position with a If you wish to program the passive arming
– Any door (including the rear registered key. mode, have it done by your SUBARU
gate) is opened. dealer.
– Ignition switch is turned to the & Valet mode ! Arming the system
“ON” position. When you choose the valet mode, the
& Disarming the system alarm system does not operate. In valet CAUTION
mode, the remote transmitter is used only
Briefly press the “ ” button (for less than for locking and unlocking the doors and In passive mode, the system will
2 seconds) on the remote transmitter. The rear gate and panic activation. automatically activate the alarm but
driver’s door will unlock, an electronic WILL NOT automatically lock the
chirp will sound twice, the turn signal To enter the valet mode, change the doors. In order to lock the doors
lights will flash twice. The flashing of the setting of your vehicle’s alarm system for you must either lock them as in-
security indicator light will then change deactivation mode. Refer to “Activating dicated in step 4 below or with the
slowly (once approximately every 3 sec- and deactivating the alarm system” F2- key once they have been closed.
onds from twice approximately every 2 15. The security indicator light will con- Failure to lock the doors manually
seconds), indicating that the alarm system tinue to flash once every 3 seconds will result in a higher security risk.
has been disarmed. indicating that the system is in the valet
mode. 1. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”
To exit valet mode, change the setting of position.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
– CONTINUED –
2-18 Keys and doors
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Keys and doors 2-19
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
2-20 Keys and doors
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
2-22 Keys and doors
CAUTION
. Do not jam a plastic bag in or
place cellophane tape on the rear
To close: gate stays or scratch the stays
Lower the rear gate slowly and push down while loading or unloading cargo.
firmly until the latch engages. That could cause leakage of gas
The rear gate can be locked and unlocked
from the stays, which may result
using any of the following systems. The rear gate can be lowered easily if you
in their inability to hold the rear
. Power door locking switch: Refer to pull it down holding the recessed grip.
gate open.
“Power door locking switches” F2-6.
WARNING . Be careful not to hit your head or
. Remote keyless entry system: Refer to
face on the rear gate when open-
“Remote keyless entry system” F2-7. . To prevent dangerous exhaust ing or closing the rear gate and
To open: gas from entering the vehicle, when loading or unloading car-
Unlock the rear gate and push the rear always keep the rear gate closed go.
gate opener button to open the rear gate. while driving.
NOTE
If the rear gate cannot be unlocked due
to a discharged vehicle battery, a
malfunction in the door locking/unlock-
ing system or other causes, you can
unlock it by manually operating the
rear gate lock release lever. For the
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Keys and doors 2-23
procedure, refer to “Rear gate – if the Moonroof (if equipped) . Never try to check the anti-en-
rear gate cannot be opened” F9-17. trapment function by deliberately
placing part of your body in the
WARNING moonroof.
Never let anyone’s hands, arms,
head or any objects protrude from CAUTION
the moonroof. A person could be
seriously injured if the vehicle stops . Do not sit on the edge of the open
suddenly or turns sharply or if the moonroof.
vehicle is involved in an accident. . Do not operate the moonroof if
To avoid serious personal injury falling snow or extremely cold
caused by entrapment, always con- conditions have caused it to
form to the following instructions freeze shut.
without exception.
. Before closing the moonroof,
make sure that no one’s hands,
arms, head or other objects will
be accidentally caught in the
moonroof.
. Before leaving the vehicle, al-
ways remove the key from the
ignition switch for safety and
never allow an unattended child
to remain in the vehicle. Failure
to follow this procedure could
result in injury to a child operat-
ing the moonroof. 1) Open/close switch
2) Open
3) Close
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
– CONTINUED –
2-24 Keys and doors
The moonroof operates only when the “CLOSE” or “OPEN” side. . If the moonroof cannot be closed
ignition switch is in the “ON” position. through switch operation because of
& Anti-entrapment function system failure, it can be closed manu-
& To open the moonroof When the moonroof senses a substantial ally using a hex-head wrench. For the
Pull the switch to the “OPEN” side and enough object trapped between its glass procedure, refer to “Moonroof – if the
quickly release it to open the moonroof. and the vehicle’s roof during closure, it moonroof cannot be closed” F9-17.
The sun shade will also be opened automatically moves back by 6 in (15 cm)
together with the moonroof. The moonroof from that point and then stops. The anti-
will stop at a position 20 in (50 cm) away entrapment function may also be activated
from the fully closed position. Pull the by a strong shock on the moonroof even
switch again to open the moonroof com- when there is nothing trapped.
pletely.
CAUTION
To stop the moonroof at a desired position,
momentarily push the switch to the Never attempt to test this function
“CLOSE” or “OPEN” side. using fingers, hands or other parts
of your body.
After washing the vehicle or after it rains,
wipe away water on the roof prior to
opening the moonroof to prevent drops NOTE
of water from falling into the passenger . For the sake of safety, it is recom-
compartment. mended that you avoid driving with the
moonroof fully opened.
& To close the moonroof . Driving with the moonroof fully open
Push the switch to the “CLOSE” side then can cause an annoying sound to gen-
quickly release it to close the moonroof. erate at high speeds. If such a condi-
The moonroof will stop at a position 8 in tion has been encountered, use the
(20 cm) away from the fully closed moonroof at the initial stop position of
position. Push the switch again to close 20 in (50 cm) away from the fully closed
the moonroof completely. position.
To stop the moonroof at a desired position,
momentarily push the switch to the
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Keys and doors 2-25
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Instruments and controls
High/low beam change (dimmer)......................... 3-26 Rear window wiper and washer switch ............... 3-32
Headlight flasher ................................................ 3-26 Mirrors ................................................................ 3-32
Daytime running light system (if equipped) ......... 3-27 Inside mirror...................................................... 3-32
Automatic headlight beam leveler (models with Outside mirrors ................................................. 3-34
HID headlights) ................................................ 3-27 Defogger and deicer .......................................... 3-35
Turn signal lever ................................................ 3-27 Tilt steering wheel (if equipped) ....................... 3-37
Illumination brightness control ......................... 3-28 Tilt/telescopic steering wheel (if equipped) ..... 3-38
Front fog light switch (if equipped) .................. 3-28 Horn .................................................................... 3-38
Wiper and washer .............................................. 3-29
Windshield wiper and washer switches ............... 3-30
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Instruments and controls 3-3
& ON
This is the normal operating position after
the engine is started.
& START
The key can be turned from “Acc” to The engine is started in this position. The
“LOCK” only when the selector lever is in starter cranks the engine to start it. When
the “P” position. the key is released (after the engine has
! Manual transmission models started), the key automatically returns to . The key grip is touching another key
the “ON” position. or a metallic key holder.
CAUTION
Do not turn the ignition switch to the
“START” position while the engine
is running.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
– CONTINUED –
3-6 Instruments and controls
The display can be switched as shown ! Odometer vehicle has been driven since you last set
below by pressing the trip knob. it to zero.
To set the trip meter to zero, select the A
trip or B trip meter by pushing the knob
and keep the knob pushed for more than 2
seconds.
CAUTION
To ensure safety, do not attempt to
change the function of the indicator
during driving, as an accident could
*: “ ” or “ ” cannot be displayed when result.
the ignition switch is in the “ON” posi-
tion. NOTE
The odometer shows the total distance
For the “ ” or “ ” indication, refer to that the vehicle has been driven. If the connection between the combina-
“Canceling the function for meter/gauge tion meter and battery is broken for any
needle movement upon turning on the ! Double trip meter
reason such as vehicle maintenance or
ignition switch” F3-6. fuse replacement, the data recorded on
the trip meter will be lost.
& Tachometer & Fuel gauge seconds or (b) open and close the driver’s
The tachometer shows the engine speed door, the fuel gauge indication will turn off.
in thousands of revolutions per minute. NOTE
CAUTION
Do not operate the engine with the
pointer of the tachometer in the red
zone. This may cause severe da-
mage to the engine.
turned ON next time, however, the passenger’s seat does not function cor- SRS curtain airbag and seatbelt preten-
complete sequence of the warning rectly (e.g., it is activated even when the sioners are operating normally.
operation resumes. For further details front passenger’s seat is empty or it is
about canceling the warning operation, deactivated even when the front passen- WARNING
please contact your SUBARU dealer. ger has not fastened his/her seatbelt),
take the following actions. If the warning light exhibits any of
If there is no passenger on the front the following conditions, there may
passenger’s seat, the seatbelt warning . Ensure that no article is placed on the
seat other than a child restraint system be a malfunction in the seatbelt
device for the front passenger’s seat will pretensioners and/or SRS airbag
be deactivated. The front passenger’s and its child occupant, although we
strongly recommend that all children sit system. Immediately take your vehi-
occupant detection system monitors cle to your nearest SUBARU dealer
whether or not there is a passenger on in the rear seat properly restrained.
to have the system checked. Unless
the front passenger’s seat. Observe the . Ensure that there is no article left in the checked and properly repaired, the
following precautions. Failure to do so seatback pocket. seatbelt pretensioners and/or SRS
may prevent the device from functioning . Ensure that the backward-forward po- airbag will not operate properly in
correctly or cause the device to fail. sition and seatback of front passenger’s the event of a collision, which may
. Do not install any accessory such as a seat are locked into place securely by increase the risk of injury.
table or TV onto the seatback. moving the seat back and forth.
. Flashing or flickering of the warn-
. Do not store a heavy load in the ing light
If still the seatbelt warning device for front
seatback pocket.
passenger’s seat does not function cor- . No illumination of the warning
. Do not allow the rear seat occupant to rectly after taking relevant corrective ac- light when the ignition switch is
place his/her hands or legs on the front tions described above, immediately con- first turned to the “ON” position
passenger’s seatback, or allow him/her to tact your SUBARU dealer for an inspec-
pull the seatback. . Continuous illumination of the
tion. warning light
. Do not use front seats with their back-
ward-forward position and seatback not & SRS airbag system . Illumination of the warning light
being locked into place securely. If any of warning light while driving
them are not locked securely, adjust them
again. For the adjustment procedure of When the ignition switch is turned to the
the manual seats, refer to “Manual seat” “ON” position, the SRS airbag system
F1-3. warning light will illuminate for approxi-
mately 6 seconds and turn off. This shows
If the seatbelt warning device for the front that the SRS airbag, SRS side airbag,
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
– CONTINUED –
3-12 Instruments and controls
& Front passenger’s frontal indicators illuminates depending on the control system checked and re-
airbag ON and OFF indica- status of the front passenger’s SRS frontal paired as necessary could cause
tors airbag determined by the SUBARU ad- serious damage, which may not be
vanced frontal airbag system monitoring. covered by your vehicle’s warranty.
If the front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag
is activated, the passenger’s frontal airbag If this light illuminates steadily or blinks
ON indicator will illuminate while the OFF while the engine is running, it may indicate
indicator will remain off. that there is a problem or potential
If the front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag problem somewhere in the emission con-
is deactivated, the passenger’s frontal trol system.
airbag ON indicator will remain off while ! If the light illuminates steadily
the OFF indicator will illuminate.
If the light illuminates steadily while driving
With the ignition switch turned to the “ON” or does not turn off after the engine starts,
position, if both the ON and OFF indica- an emission control system malfunction
tors remain illuminated or off simulta- has been detected.
neously even after the system check
period, the system is faulty. Contact your You should have your vehicle checked by
ON / : Front passenger’s frontal airbag ON an authorized SUBARU dealer immedi-
indicator SUBARU dealer immediately for an in-
/ : Front passenger’s frontal airbag OFF spection. ately.
indicator
NOTE
The front passenger’s frontal airbag ON & CHECK ENGINE warn- This light also illuminates when the fuel
and OFF indicators show you the status of ing light/Malfunction in- filler cap is not tightened until it clicks.
the front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag. dicator lamp
If you have recently refueled your vehicle,
The indicators are located next to the the cause of the CHECK ENGINE warning
clock in the center portion of the dash- CAUTION
light/malfunction indicator lamp coming on
board. could be a loose or missing fuel filler cap.
If the CHECK ENGINE light illumi-
When the ignition switch is turned to the nates while you are driving, have Remove the cap and retighten it until it
“ON” position, both the ON and OFF your vehicle checked/repaired by clicks. Make sure nothing is interfering
indicators illuminate for 6 seconds during your SUBARU dealer as soon as with the sealing of the cap. Tightening the
which time the system is checked. Follow- possible. Continued vehicle opera- cap will not make the CHECK ENGINE
ing the system check, both indicators turn tion without having the emission warning light turn off immediately. It may
off for 2 seconds. After that, one of the
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Instruments and controls 3-13
take several driving trips. If the light does & Coolant temperature After that, have the system
not turn off, take your vehicle to your low indicator light/Cool- checked by your nearest
authorized SUBARU dealer immediately. ant temperature high SUBARU dealer. Refer to “En-
! If the light is blinking warning light gine overheating” F9-12.
If the light is blinking while driving, an – Blinking in RED and BLUE
engine misfire condition has been de- CAUTION alternately:
tected which may damage the emission The electrical system may be
control system. . After turning the ignition switch malfunctioning. Contact your
to the “ON” position, if this SUBARU dealer for an inspec-
To prevent serious damage to the emis-
indicator light/warning light be- tion.
sion control system, you should do the
haves under any of the following
following.
conditions, the electrical system This coolant temperature low indicator
. Reduce vehicle speed. may be malfunctioning. Contact light/coolant temperature high warning
. Avoid hard acceleration. your SUBARU dealer immedi- light has the following three functions.
. Avoid steep uphill grades. ately for an inspection. . Illumination in BLUE indicates insuffi-
. Reduce the amount of cargo, if possi- – It remains blinking in RED. cient warming up of the engine
ble. . Blinking in RED indicates that the
– It remains illuminated in RED
The CHECK ENGINE warning light may for more than 2 seconds. engine is close to overheating
stop blinking and illuminate steadily after – It remains blinking in RED and . Illumination in RED indicates overheat-
several driving trips. You should have your BLUE alternately. ing condition of the engine
vehicle checked by an authorized . While driving, if this indicator For the system check, this indicator light/
SUBARU dealer immediately. light/warning light behaves under warning light illuminates in RED for
any of the following conditions, approximately 2 seconds when the igni-
take the specified appropriate tion switch is turned to the “ON” position.
measure listed below. After that, this indicator light/warning light
– Blinking or illuminated in changes to BLUE and maintains illumina-
RED: tion in BLUE. This BLUE illuminated light
Safely stop the vehicle as turns off when the engine is warmed up
soon as possible, and refer sufficiently.
to the emergency steps for the If the engine coolant temperature in-
case of engine overheating.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
– CONTINUED –
3-14 Instruments and controls
creases over the appropriate range, the & Charge warning light CAUTION
indicator light/warning light blinks in RED.
At this time, the engine is close to over- If this light illuminates when the engine is Do not operate the engine with the
heating. running, it may indicate that the charging oil pressure warning light on. This
system is not working properly. may cause serious engine damage.
If the engine coolant temperature in-
creases further, the indicator light/warning If the light illuminates while driving or does
light illuminates in RED continuously. At not turn off after the engine starts, stop the
this time, the engine may be overheating. engine at the first safe opportunity and & AT OIL TEMP warning
check the alternator belt. If the belt is light (AT models)
When the indicator light/warning light loose, broken or if the belt is in good
blinks in RED or illuminates in RED, safely The AT oil temperature warning light “AT
condition but the light remains on, contact
stop the vehicle as soon as possible, and OIL TEMP” illuminates when the ignition
your nearest SUBARU dealer immedi-
refer to the emergency steps for the case switch is turned to the “ON” position and
ately.
of engine overheating. Refer to “Engine turns off after the engine has started.
overheating” F9-12. After that, have the & Oil pressure warning If this light illuminates when the engine is
running, it may indicate that the automatic
system checked by your nearest light
SUBARU dealer. transmission fluid temperature is too hot.
If this light illuminates when the engine is
Also, if the indicator light/warning light If the light illuminates while driving, im-
running, it may indicate that the engine oil
often blinks in RED, the electrical system mediately stop the vehicle in a safe place
pressure is low and the lubricating system
may be malfunctioning. Contact your and let the engine idle until the warning
is not working properly.
SUBARU dealer for an inspection. light turns off.
If the light illuminates while driving or does
not turn off after the engine starts, stop the ! Automatic transmission control
NOTE system warning
engine at the first safe opportunity and
If the engine is restarted after a certain check the engine oil level. If the oil level is
driving condition, this indicator light/ If the light flashes after the engine starts, it
low, add oil immediately. If the engine oil is may indicate that the automatic transmis-
warning light may illuminate in RED. at the proper level but the light remains on,
However, this is not a malfunction if the sion control system is not working prop-
contact your nearest SUBARU dealer erly. Contact your nearest SUBARU deal-
indicator light/warning light turns off immediately.
after a short time. er for service immediately.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Instruments and controls 3-15
& Low tire pressure can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also vehicle to ensure that the replacement or
warning light (U.S.-spec. reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS
models) and may affect the vehicle’s handling and to continue to function properly.
stopping ability. Should the warning light illuminate stea-
When the ignition switch is turned to the Please note that the TPMS is not a dily after blinking for approximately one
“ON” position, the low tire pressure warn- substitute for proper tire maintenance, minute, have the system inspected by
ing light will illuminate for approximately 2 and it is the driver’s responsibility to your nearest SUBARU dealer as soon as
seconds to check that the tire pressure maintain correct tire pressure, even if possible.
monitoring system (TPMS) is functioning under-inflation has not reached the level
properly. If there is no problem and all tires to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire WARNING
are properly inflated, the light will turn off. pressure telltale.
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), Your vehicle has also been equipped with If this light does not illuminate
should be checked monthly when cold a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate briefly after the ignition switch is
and inflated to the inflation pressure when the system is not operating properly. turned ON or the light illuminates
recommended by the vehicle manufac- The TPMS malfunction indicator is com- steadily after blinking for approxi-
turer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation bined with the low tire pressure telltale. mately one minute, you should have
pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires of When the system detects a malfunction, your Tire Pressure Monitoring Sys-
a different size than the size indicated on the telltale will flash for approximately one tem checked at a SUBARU dealer as
the vehicle placard or tire inflation pres- minute and then remain continuously soon as possible.
sure label, you should determine the illuminated. This sequence will continue If this light illuminates while driving,
proper inflation pressure for those tires.) upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long never brake suddenly and keep
as the malfunction exists. When the driving straight ahead while gradu-
As an added safety feature, your vehicle ally reducing speed. Then slowly
has been equipped with a tire pressure malfunction indicator is illuminated, the
system may not be able to detect or signal pull off the road to a safe place.
monitoring system (TPMS) that illuminates Otherwise an accident involving
a low tire pressure telltale when one or low tire pressure as intended. TPMS
malfunctions may occur for a variety of serious vehicle damage and serious
more of your tires is significantly under- personal injury could occur.
inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire reasons, including the installation of re-
pressure telltale illuminates, you should placement or alternate tires or wheels on If this light still illuminates while
stop and check your tires as soon as the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from driving after adjusting the tire pres-
possible, and inflate them to the proper functioning properly. Always check the sure, a tire may have significant
pressure. Driving on a significantly under- TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing damage and a fast leak that causes
inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and one or more tires or wheels on your the tire to lose air rapidly. If you have
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
– CONTINUED –
3-16 Instruments and controls
a flat tire, replace it with a spare tire sures, increase the vehicle speed to . The warning light illuminates
as soon as possible. at least 20 mph (32 km/h) to start the when the ignition switch is
When a spare tire is mounted or a TPMS re-checking of the tire infla- turned to the “ON” position, but
wheel rim is replaced without the tion pressures. If the tire pressures it does not turn off even when the
original pressure sensor/transmitter are now above the severe low vehicle speed exceeds approxi-
being transferred, the Low tire pres- pressure threshold, the low tire mately 8 mph (12 km/h).
sure warning light will illuminate pressure warning light should turn . The warning light illuminates dur-
steadily after blinking for approxi- off a few minutes later. Therefore, be ing driving.
mately one minute. This indicates sure to install the specified size for
the front and rear tires. If any of these conditions occur,
the TPMS is unable to monitor all have the ABS system repaired at
four road wheels. Contact your the first available opportunity by
SUBARU dealer as soon as possible
for tire and sensor replacement and/ & ABS warning light your SUBARU dealer.
or system resetting. If the light The ABS warning light illuminates when With a vehicle equipped with an EBD
illuminates steadily after blinking the ignition switch is turned to the “ON” system, the ABS warning light illuminates
for approximately one minute, position and turns off after approximately 2 together with the brake system warning
promptly contact a SUBARU dealer seconds. light if the EBD system becomes faulty.
to have the system inspected. This is an indication that the ABS system For further details of the EBD system fault
is working properly. warning, refer to “Brake system warning
light” F3-17.
CAUTION CAUTION
NOTE
The tire pressure monitoring system If the warning light behaves as If the warning light behavior is as
is NOT a substitute for manually follows, the ABS system may not described in the following, the ABS
checking tire pressure. The tire work properly. system may be considered normal.
pressure should be checked peri-
odically (at least monthly) using a When the warning light is on, the . The warning light illuminates right
tire gauge. After any change to tire ABS function shuts down; however, after the engine is started but turns off
pressure(s), the tire pressure mon- the conventional brake system con- immediately, remaining off.
itoring system will not re-check tire tinues to operate normally. . The warning light remains on after
inflation pressures until the vehicle . The warning light does not illu- the engine has been started, but it
is first driven more than 20 mph (32 minate when the ignition switch turns off when the vehicle speed
km/h). After adjusting the tire pres- is turned to the “ON” position. reaches approximately 8 mph (12
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Instruments and controls 3-17
km/h). ! Parking brake warning the brake system warning light and ABS
. The warning light illuminates during The light illuminates with the parking warning light illuminate simultaneously
driving, but it turns off immediately and brake applied while the ignition switch is during driving.
remains off. in the “ON” position. It turns off when the Even if the EBD system fails, the conven-
When driving with an insufficient battery parking brake is fully released. tional braking system will still function.
voltage such as when the engine is jump However, the rear wheels will be more
! Brake fluid level warning prone to locking when the brakes are
started, the ABS warning light may illumi-
nate. This is due to the low battery voltage This light illuminates when the brake fluid applied harder than usual and the vehi-
and does not indicate a malfunction. level has dropped to near the “MIN” level cle’s motion may therefore become some-
When the battery becomes fully charged, of the brake fluid reservoir with the ignition what harder to control.
the light will turn off. switch in the “ON” position and with the If the brake system warning light and ABS
parking brake fully released. warning light illuminate simultaneously,
& Brake system warning If the brake system warning light should take the following steps.
light illuminate while driving (with the parking 1. Stop the vehicle in the nearest safe,
brake fully released and with the ignition flat place.
WARNING switch positioned in “ON”), it could be an 2. Shut down the engine, apply the
indication of leaking of brake fluid or worn parking brake and then restart it.
. Driving with the brake system brake pads. If this occurs, immediately 3. Release the parking brake. If both
warning light on is dangerous. stop the vehicle at the nearest safe place warning lights turn off, the EBD system
This indicates your brake system and check the brake fluid level. If the fluid may be faulty. Drive carefully to the
may not be working properly. If level is below the “MIN” mark in the nearest SUBARU dealer and have the
the light remains on, have the reservoir, do not drive the vehicle. Have system inspected.
brakes inspected by a SUBARU the vehicle towed to the nearest SUBARU
dealer immediately. 4. If both warning lights illuminate again
dealer for repair. and stay illuminated after the engine has
. If at all in doubt about whether
! Electronic Brake Force Distribution been restarted, shut down the engine
the brakes are operating prop- again, apply the parking brake, and check
(EBD) system warning
erly, do not drive the vehicle. the brake fluid level.
Have your vehicle towed to the The brake system warning light also
illuminates if a malfunction occurs in the 5. If the brake fluid level is not below the
nearest SUBARU dealer for re-
EBD system. In that event, it illuminates “MIN” mark, the EBD system may be
pair.
together with the ABS warning light. faulty. Drive carefully to the nearest
The EBD system may be malfunctioning if SUBARU dealer and have the system
This light has the following three functions.
inspected.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
– CONTINUED –
3-18 Instruments and controls
6. If the brake fluid level is below the & Hill start assist warning engine has started.
“MIN” mark, DO NOT drive the vehicle. light (MT models) This light illuminates when All-Wheel
Instead, have the vehicle towed to the Drive is disengaged and the drive me-
nearest SUBARU dealer for repair. When the ignition switch is in the “ON” chanism is switched to Front Wheel Drive
position, the Hill start assist warning light for maintenance or similar purposes.
& Low fuel warning light illuminates and turns off after approxi-
It flashes if the vehicle is driven with tires
mately 2 seconds. While the engine is
The low fuel warning light illuminates of differing diameters fitted on the wheels
rotating, if there are any malfunctions, the
when the tank is nearly empty approxi- or with an excessively low air pressure in
light will illuminate.
mately 2.6 US gal (10.0 liters, or 2.2 Imp any of the tires.
gal). It only operates when the ignition WARNING
switch is in the “ON” position. When this CAUTION
light illuminates, fill the fuel tank immedi- When the Hill start assist system
Continuing to drive with the AWD
ately. light illuminates, have the vehicle
warning light flashing can damage
inspected at an authorized SUBARU
NOTE the powertrain. If the AWD warning
dealer.
light starts to flash, promptly park in
This light does not turn off unless the a safe place and check whether the
tank is replenished up to an internal tires have differing diameters and
fuel quantity of approximately 3.7 US & Door open warning whether any of the tires has an
gal (14 liters, 3.1 Imp gal). light excessively low inflation pressure.
The door open warning light illuminates if
CAUTION any door or the rear gate is not fully
closed. & Automatic headlight
Promptly put fuel in the tank when-
ever the low fuel warning light
beam leveler warning
Always make sure this light is out before
illuminates. Engine misfires as a you start to drive.
light (models with HID
result of an empty tank could cause headlights)
damage to the engine. & All-Wheel Drive warn- The automatic headlight beam leveler
ing light (AT models) warning light illuminates when the ignition
switch is turned to the “ON” position and
The All-Wheel Drive warning light illumi- turns off after approximately 3 seconds.
nates when the ignition switch is turned to
the “ON” position and turns off after the This light illuminates when the automatic
headlight beam leveler does not operate
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Instruments and controls 3-19
after the engine is started but turns off the lapse of several minutes (the engine In case an unauthorized key is used (e.g.,
immediately, remaining off. has warmed up) after the engine has an imitation key), the security indicator
. The warning light illuminates after started. light illuminates.
engine startup and turns off while the
vehicle is subsequently being driven. & Security indicator light NOTE
. The warning light illuminates during Even if the security indicator light
driving, but it turns off immediately and flashes irregularly or its fuse blows
remains off. (the light does not flash if its fuse is
blown), the immobilizer system will
! Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF in- function normally.
dicator light
. It illuminates when the Vehicle Dy- & SPORT mode indicator
namics Control OFF switch is pressed. light (AT models)
. It also illuminates when the Vehicle
Dynamics Control system is deactivated. This light illuminates when the ignition
switch is turned to the “ON” position and
NOTE turns off after the engine has started.
. The light may remain on for a while When the selector lever is moved to the
after the engine has been started, manual gate, the SPORT mode is se-
especially in cold weather. This does lected and the indicator light illuminates.
not indicate the existence of a problem. The security indicator light deters potential Refer to “SPORT mode” F7-21.
The light should turn off as soon as the thieves by indicating that the vehicle is
engine has warmed up. equipped with an immobilizer system. It
. The indicator light illuminates when begins flashing (approximately once every
the engine has developed a problem 3 seconds) approximately 60 seconds
and the CHECK ENGINE warning light/ after the ignition switch is turned from the
malfunction indicator lamp is on. “ON” position to the “Acc” or “LOCK”
position or immediately after the key is
The Vehicle Dynamics Control system is pulled out.
probably faulty under the following condi-
If the security indicator light does not flash,
tion. Have your vehicle checked at a
the immobilizer system may not be func-
SUBARU dealer as soon as possible.
tioning properly. If this occurs, contact
. The light does not turn off even after your SUBARU dealer as soon as possible.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Instruments and controls 3-21
& Selector lever and gear posi- & High beam indicator & Cruise control set in-
tion indicator (AT models) light dicator light
This light shows that the headlights are in The cruise control set indicator light
the high beam mode. illuminates when the ignition switch is
This indicator light also illuminates when turned to the “ON” position and turns off
the headlight flasher is operated. after approximately 3 seconds.
This light illuminates when vehicle speed
& Cruise control indica- has been set.
tor light
& Front fog light indicator
The cruise control indicator light illumi-
nates when the ignition switch is turned to
light (if equipped)
the “ON” position and turns off after This indicator light is on while the front fog
approximately 3 seconds. lights are on.
This light illuminates when the “CRUISE”
This indicator shows the position of the main switch is pressed. & Headlight indicator
selector lever. If you press the main switch button while light
When the manual mode is selected, the turning the ignition switch “ON”, the cruise This indicator light illuminates when the
gear position indicator (which shows the control function is deactivated and the headlight switch is placed in the “ ” or
current gear selection) and the upshift/ “CRUISE” indicator light flashes. To re- “ ” position.
downshift indicator light up. Refer to activate the cruise control function, turn
“Automatic transmission” F7-16. the ignition switch back to the “Acc” or
“LOCK” position, and then turn it again to
& Turn signal indicator the “ON” position.
lights
These lights show the operation of the turn
signal or lane change signal.
If the indicator lights do not blink or blink
rapidly, the turn signal bulb may be burned
out. Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
Refer to “Replacing bulbs” F11-47.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
3-22 Instruments and controls
NOTE
If the battery is disconnected, the time
will be erased. After reconnecting the
battery, set the correct time.
The clock shows the time while the 1) Outside temperature indicator
ignition switch is in the “Acc” or “ON” 2) Fuel consumption indicator
position. With the ignition switch in the “ON”
position, the outside temperature and fuel
The time changes by 1 minute each time
consumption are indicated on the display.
the “+” button or “−” button is pressed.
Pressing the “+” button moves the dis-
played time forward, while pressing the “−”
button moves the displayed time back.
Pressing and holding either button
changes the displayed time continuously.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Instruments and controls 3-23
The fuel consumption display is linked & Outside temperature indica- ! Road surface freeze warning indi-
with the odometer/trip meter display ac- tor cation
cording to the following chart.
Odometer/Trip
meter Fuel consumption indicator
The outside temperature indicator shows When the outside temperature drops to
the outside temperature in a range from 378F (38C) or lower, the temperature
−22 to 1228F (−30 to 508C). indication flashes to show that the road
surface may be frozen.
The indicator can give a false reading If the outside temperature drops to 378F
under any of the following conditions: (38C) or lower while the display is giving
. When there is too much sun. an indication other than the outside
. During idling; while running at low temperature, the display switches to the
speeds in a traffic jam; when the engine outside temperature indication and flashes
is restarted immediately following a shut- for 5 seconds before returning to its
down. original indication.
. When the actual outside temperature If the display is already indicating an
falls outside the specified indicator range. outside temperature of 378F (38C) or lower
when the ignition switch is turned to the
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
– CONTINUED –
3-24 Instruments and controls
“ON” position, the indication does not & Average fuel consumption reset, the average fuel consumption
flash. corresponding to that trip meter indica-
tion is not shown until the vehicle has
NOTE subsequently covered a distance of 1
The outside temperature indication mile (or 1 km).
may differ from the actual outside
temperature. The road surface freeze
warning indication should be treated
& To turn off fuel consumption
only as a guide. Be sure to check the indicator display
condition of the road surface before The fuel consumption indicator display
driving. can be turned off.
To turn off this display, turn the ignition
switch to the “LOCK” position and press
& Current fuel consumption (if the “+” button adjacent to the information
equipped) display for approximately 5 seconds.
1) U.S.-spec. models Then, the information display and the
2) Except U.S.-spec. models clock display will blink for 3 seconds to
This indication shows the average rate of notify you that the fuel consumption dis-
fuel consumption since the trip meter was play has been turned off.
last reset. To restore the indicator, once again press
When either of the trip meter indications is the “+” button for approximately 5 sec-
reset, the corresponding average fuel onds.
consumption value is also reset.
NOTE
NOTE . The initial display setting of the fuel
. The indicated values vary in accor- consumption indicator of your vehicle
dance with changes in the vehicle’s has been set to operational at the time
running conditions. Also, the indicated of shipment from the factory.
1) U.S.-spec. models values may differ slightly from the . The average fuel consumption is
2) Except U.S.-spec. models actual values and should thus be calculated even while the indicator is
This indication shows the rate of fuel treated only as a guide. not displayed.
consumption at the present moment. . When either trip meter indication is . Even if you turn off the fuel con-
sumption indicator, the fuel consump-
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Instruments and controls 3-25
tion indicator will automatically turn on Light control switch a long time with the light control
when the battery voltage is discon- switch set to a position other
nected and then reconnected for bat- The light control switch only operates than “OFF”, the battery may be
tery replacement or fuse replacement. when the ignition key is inserted into the discharged.
ignition switch.
Regardless of the position of the light
control switch, the illuminated lights are
turned off when the ignition key is
removed from the ignition switch.
NOTE
. Even if the ignition key is removed
from the ignition switch, the lights can
be illuminated by operating the light
control switch position from “OFF” to
“ ” and/or “ ”.
. If the driver’s door is opened while
the lights are illuminated and the igni-
tion key is removed from the ignition
switch, the chirp sound informs the
driver that the lights are illuminated.
CAUTION
. Use of any lights for a long period
of time while the engine is not
running can cause the battery to
discharge.
. Before leaving the vehicle, make
sure that the light control switch
is turned to the “OFF” position. If
the vehicle is left unattended for
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
– CONTINUED –
3-26 Instruments and controls
& Headlights & High/low beam change (dim- & Headlight flasher
mer)
To turn on the headlights, turn the knob on To flash the headlights, pull the lever
the end of the turn signal lever. To change from low beam to high beam, toward you and then release it. The high
first position push the turn signal lever forward. When beam will remain on for as long as you
the headlights are on high beam, the high hold the lever. The headlight flasher works
Instrument panel illumination, tail lights,
beam indicator light “ ” on the combina- even though the light switch is in the
front side marker lights and license plate “OFF” position.
tion meter is also on.
lights are on.
To switch back to low beam, pull the lever When the headlights are on high beam,
second position back to the detent position. the high beam indicator light “ ” on the
Headlights, instrument panel illumination, combination meter also illuminates.
tail lights, front side marker lights, and
license plate lights are on. CAUTION
Do not hold the lever in the flashing
position for more than just a few
seconds.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Instruments and controls 3-27
& Daytime running light system & Automatic headlight beam Turn signal lever
(if equipped) leveler (models with HID
headlights)
WARNING The HID headlights generate more light
than conventional halogen headlights.
The brightness of the illumination of
the high beam headlights is reduced Therefore a driver of an oncoming vehicle
by the daytime running light system. may experience too much glare when your
The light switch must always be headlight beam height adjustment is high
turned to the “ ” position when it due to the vehicle carrying heavy load.
is dark outside. The automatic headlight beam leveler
adjusts the headlight beam height auto-
The high beam headlights will automati- matically and optimally according to the
cally illuminate at reduced brightness load being carried by the vehicle.
when the engine has started, under the
following conditions: To activate the right turn signal, push the
. The selector lever is in a position other turn signal lever up. To activate the left
than the “P” position (AT models). turn signal, push the turn signal lever
. The parking brake is fully released. down. When the turn is finished, the lever
. The light switch is in the “OFF” or “ ” will return automatically. If the lever does
position. not return after cornering, return the lever
to the neutral position by hand.
NOTE
To signal a lane change, push the turn
When the light switch is in the “ ”
signal lever up or down slightly and hold it
position, the front side marker lights,
during the lane change. The turn signal
tail lights and license plate lights are
indicator lights will flash in the direction of
also illuminated.
the turn or lane change. The lever will
return automatically to the neutral position
when you release it.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
3-28 Instruments and controls
The brightness of clock display, audio, air The front fog lights operate only when the
conditioner, information display and instru- low beam headlights are illuminated.
ment panel illumination dims when the However, the front fog lights turn off when
light switch is in the “ ” or “ ” the headlights are switched to high beam.
positions. You can adjust brightness of To turn on the front fog lights, turn the front
the instrument panel illumination for better fog light switch on the turn signal lever
visibility. upward to the “ ” position. To turn off the
To brighten, turn the control dial upward. front fog lights, turn the switch back down
To darken, turn the control dial downward. to the “OFF” position.
NOTE
When the control dial is turned fully
upward, the illumination brightness
becomes the maximum and the auto-
matic dimming function does not work
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Instruments and controls 3-29
Refer to “Windshield washer road film. Keep the washer button & Windshield wiper and washer
fluid” F11-39. depressed at least for 1 second so that switches
Also, when driving the vehicle washer solution will be sprinkled all
over the windshield or rear window. The wiper operates only when the ignition
when there are freezing tempera-
. Grease, wax, insects or other mate- switch is in the “ON” or “Acc” position.
tures, use non-freezing type wi-
per blades. rial on the windshield or the wiper ! Windshield wipers
blade results in jerky wiper operation
. Do not clean the wiper blades and streaking on the glass. If you
with gasoline or a solvent, such cannot remove those streaks after
as paint thinner or benzine. This operating the washer or if the wiper
will cause deterioration of the operation is jerky, clean the outer sur-
wiper blades. face of the windshield or rear window
and the wiper blades using a sponge or
NOTE soft cloth with a neutral detergent or
mild-abrasive cleaner. After cleaning,
. The wiper operates only when the rinse the window glass and wiper
ignition switch is in the “ON” or “Acc” blades with clean water. The glass is
position. clean if no beads form on the glass
. The front wiper motor is protected when you rinse with water.
against overloads by a circuit breaker. . If you cannot eliminate the streaking
If the motor operates continuously OFF: Off
even after following this procedure, : Intermittent
under an unusually heavy load, the replace the wiper blades with new
circuit breaker may trip to stop the LO: Low speed
ones. For replacement instructions, HI: High speed
motor temporarily. If this happens, park refer to “Replacement of wiper blades”
your vehicle in a safe place, turn off the F11-40. To turn the wipers on, push the wiper
wiper switch, and wait for approxi- control lever down.
mately 10 minutes. The circuit breaker To turn the wipers off, return the lever to
will reset itself, and the wipers will the “OFF” position.
again operate normally.
. Clean your wiper blades and win-
dow glass periodically with a washer
solution to prevent streaking, and to
remove accumulations of road salt or
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Instruments and controls 3-31
When the wiper switch is in the “ ” For a single wipe of the wipers, pull the To wash the windshield, push the washer
position, turn the dial to adjust the operat- lever toward you. The wipers operate until button at the end of the wiper control lever.
ing interval of the wiper. you release the lever. The washer fluid sprays until you release
The operating interval can be adjusted the washer button. The wipers operate
continuously from the shortest interval to while you push the button.
the longest.
The operating interval can be adjusted in
nine steps.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
– CONTINUED –
3-32 Instruments and controls
! Auto-dimming mirror/compass (if illuminated compass reading will appear cotton cloth or an applicator.
equipped) in the lower part of the mirror.
! Compass calibration
Even with the mirror in anti-glare mode, 1. For optimum calibration, switch off all
the mirror surface turns bright if the nonessential electrical accessories (rear
transmission is shifted into reverse. This window defogger, heater/air conditioning
is to ensure good rearward visibility during system, spotlight, etc.) and ensure all
reversing. doors are shut.
! Photosensors 2. Drive to an open, level area away from
large metallic objects or structures and
make certain the ignition switch is in the
“ON” position.
3. Press and hold the left button for 3
seconds then release, and the compass
will enter the calibration mode. “CAL” and
1) Left button direction will be displayed.
2) Auto dimming indicator 4. Drive slowly in a circle until “CAL”
3) Photosensor disappears from the display (approxi-
4) Right button mately two or three circles). The compass
The auto-dimming mirror has an anti-glare is now calibrated.
feature which automatically reduces glare 5. Further calibration may be necessary
coming from headlights of vehicles behind should outside influences cause the mirror
you. It also contains a built-in compass. The mirror has a photosensor attached on to read inaccurately. You will know that
. By pressing and releasing the left both the front and back sides. If the glare this has occurred if your compass begins
button, the automatic dimming function is from the headlights of vehicles behind you to read in only limited directions. Should
toggled on or off. When the automatic strikes the mirror, these sensors detect it you encounter this situation, return to step
dimming function is on, the auto dimming and make the reflection surface of the one of the above procedure and recali-
indicator light (green) located to the right mirror dimmer to help prevent you from brate the mirror.
of the button will illuminate. being blinded. For this reason, use care
. By pressing and releasing the right not to cover the sensors with stickers, or
button, the compass display is toggled on other similar items. Periodically wipe the
or off. When the compass is on, an sensors clean using a piece of dry soft
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
– CONTINUED –
3-34 Instruments and controls
! Compass zone adjustment 4. Releasing the button for 3 seconds will ! Remote control mirror switch
exit the zone setting mode.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Instruments and controls 3-35
! Power folding mirror switch (if work. This is not a malfunction. Oper- Defogger and deicer
equipped) ate after waiting for a short period of
time.
. When you unfold the outside mirrors
manually, the mirrors may become
wobbly. Be sure to unfold the mirrors
by switch operation. If the outside
mirrors are still wobbly, fold the mirrors
again and then unfold them by switch
operation.
window defogger. For some models, the windshield wiper blades have been deiced
outside mirror defogger and/or windshield completely before that time, push the
wiper deicer are/is also equipped. The control switch to turn them off. If defrost-
defogger and deicer system is activated ing, defogging or deicing is not complete,
only when the ignition switch is in the “ON” you have to push the control switch to turn
position. them on again.
For models with the automatic climate
control system, it is possible to set the
defogger and deicer system for the con-
tinuous operation mode as follows.
. Models with genuine SUBARU navi-
gation system:
Automatic climate control system The defogger and deicer system setting
To activate the defogger and deicer can be changed for continuous operation
system, push the control switch that is using the navigation monitor. For details,
located on the climate control panel. The refer to the Owner’s Manual supplement
rear window defogger, outside mirror for the navigation system.
defogger and windshield wiper deicer are The setting can also be changed by a
Manual climate control system activated simultaneously. The indicator SUBARU dealer. Contact your SUBARU
light on the control switch illuminates while dealer for details.
the defogger and deicer system is acti- . Models without genuine SUBARU
vated. navigation system:
The setting can be changed by a
To turn them off, push the control switch
SUBARU dealer. Contact your SUBARU
again. They also turn off when the ignition
dealer for details.
switch is turned to the “Acc” or “LOCK”
position. If the battery voltage drops below the
permissible level, continuous operation of
The defogger and deicer system will
the defogger and deicer system is can-
automatically shut off after approximately
celed and the system stops operating.
15 minutes. If the rear window and the
outside mirrors have been cleared and the
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Instruments and controls 3-37
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Climate control
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
4-2 Climate control
Ventilator
& Air flow selection
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Climate control 4-3
& Center and side ventilators ! Side ventilators Manual climate control sys-
! Center ventilators tem (if equipped)
& Control panel
1) Open
2) Close
Move the tab up and down or right and left 3) Thumb-wheel
to adjust the flow direction.
Move the tab up and down or right and left 1) Temperature control dial
to adjust the flow direction. 2) Fan speed control dial
To open or close the ventilator, turn the 3) Air flow control dial
thumb-wheel up or down. 4) Control switch of the defogger and deicer
system (Refer to “Defogger and deicer”
F3-35.)
5) Air conditioner button
6) Air inlet selection button
! Temperature control dial
This dial regulates the temperature of air
flow from the air outlets over a range from
the blue side (cool) to red side (warm).
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
– CONTINUED –
4-4 Climate control
! Fan speed control dial side air” mode. ! Air inlet selection button
The fan operates only when the ignition In this state, you cannot select “recir-
switch is turned to the “ON” position. The culation” mode by manually pressing
fan speed control dial is used to select the air inlet selection button.
four fan speeds. Also, you cannot stop the air condi-
tioner compressor by pressing the air
! Air flow control dial
conditioner button.
This dial has the following five positions:
! Air conditioner button
: Air flows through the instrument panel
outlets.
: Air flows through the instrument panel
outlets and the foot outlets.
: Air flows through the foot outlets and
some through the windshield defroster ON position (Recirculation): Interior air
outlets. is recirculated inside the vehicle. Push the
air inlet selection button to the ON posi-
: Air flows through the windshield tion. The indicator light will illuminate.
defroster outlets and foot outlets. Place the air inlet selection button to the
: Air flows through the windshield ON position for fast cooling with the air
defroster outlets. conditioner or when driving on a dusty
road.
NOTE The air conditioner operates only when
the engine is running. OFF position (Outside air): Outside air is
When the dial is placed in the “ ” or
drawn into the passenger compartment.
“ ” position, the air conditioner com- Push the air conditioner button while the Push the air inlet selection button again to
pressor operates automatically regard- fan is in operation to turn on the air the OFF position. The indicator light will
less of the position of the air condi- conditioner. The indicator light will illumi- turn off.
tioner button to defog the windshield nate.
quickly. However the indicator on the Place the air inlet selection button to the
air conditioner button will not illumi- Push it again to turn off the air conditioner. OFF position when the interior has cooled
nate. At the same time, the air inlet to a comfortable temperature and the road
selection is automatically set to “out- is no longer dusty.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Climate control 4-5
To direct warm air toward the floor: This setting allows you to direct air of
1. Set the air inlet selection button to the different temperatures from the instrument To force outside air through the instrument
OFF position. panel and foot outlets. The air from the panel outlets:
2. Set the air flow control dial to the “ ” foot outlets is slightly warmer than from 1. Set the air inlet selection button to the
position. the instrument panel outlets. OFF position.
3. Set the temperature control dial to the 1. Set the air inlet selection button to the 2. Set the air flow control dial to the “ ”
most comfortable level. OFF position. position.
4. Set the fan speed control dial to the 2. Set the air flow control dial to the “ ” 3. Set the temperature control dial all the
desired speed. position. way left.
3. Set the temperature control dial to the 4. Set the fan speed control dial to the
desired temperature level. desired speed.
4. Set the fan speed control dial to the
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Climate control 4-7
When driving on a dusty road, set the air through the instrument panel outlets: red side.
inlet selection button to the “ON” position. 1. Set the air inlet selection button to the 3. Set the fan speed control dial at the
OFF position. highest speed.
WARNING 2. Set the air flow control dial to the “ ”
The air conditioner compressor automati-
Continued operation with the air position.
cally operates when the air flow control
inlet selection button in the ON 3. Set the air conditioner button to the dial set in the “ ” or “ ” position to
position may fog up the windows. “ON” position. provide better defogging performance.
Switch to the OFF position as soon 4. Set the temperature control dial to the
as the outside dusty condition blue side.
clears. 5. Set the fan speed control dial at the
highest speed.
& Air conditioner operation ! Defrosting or defogging
! Cooling or dehumidifying
Automatic climate control sor automatically and the “A/C” indi- set the other dials and buttons as de-
cator light on the control panel illumi- scribed in the following. The system’s
system (if equipped) nates. functions will then switch to AUTO mode
Although this climate control system can and be controlled automatically.
be used as a full-automatic climate control & Control panel . Air flow control dial: AUTO position
system, it can also, if desired, be used as . Fan speed control dial: AUTO position
a semi-automatic climate control system.
When it is used as a full-automatic climate & To use as semi-automatic
control system, the outlet air temperature, climate control system
fan speed, air flow distribution, air inlet Each function can be individually set to
control, and air conditioner compressor AUTO mode independently of the others.
operation are all automatically controlled Any function set to AUTO mode is con-
to maintain a constant, comfortable tem- trolled automatically. Any function not set
perature inside the vehicle. to AUTO mode can be manually adjusted
as desired.
NOTE
The temperature can be set within a range
. Operate the automatic climate con-
of 65 to 858F (20 to 308C).
trol system when the engine is running.
. When the engine coolant is cold, the
1) Temperature control dial
blower does not run.
2) Fan speed control dial
. In the “AUTO” mode, when the air
3) Air flow control dial
temperature in the passenger compart- 4) Control switch of the defogger and deicer
ment is sufficiently cool, the air condi- system (Refer to “Defogger and deicer”
tioner compressor does not operate. F3-35.)
For efficient defogging or dehumidify- 5) Air inlet selection button
ing in cold weather, press the “A/C” 6) Air conditioner button
button to operate the air conditioner
compressor. & To use as full-automatic cli-
. Even when cooling is not necessary, mate control system
setting the temperature much lower
than the current outlet air temperature Place the temperature control dial in the
turns on the air conditioner compres- position for your desired temperature, then
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Climate control 4-9
& Fan speed control dial NOTE the system gives maximum cooling per-
With the fan speed control dial in the formance. If the dial is turned fully clock-
AUTO position and the air flow control wise, the system gives maximum heating
dial in the “ ”, “ ”, or “ ” position, performance.
the fan does not operate during engine
warm-up until the engine coolant tem- & Air flow control dial
perature exceeds approximately 1228F
(508C).
: Foot outlets and windshield defroster when driving on a dusty road. The & Air conditioner button
outlets (relatively little air from windshield indicator light will illuminate.
defroster outlets) OFF position (Outside Air): Outside air
: Windshield defroster outlets and foot is drawn into the passenger compartment.
outlets Push the air inlet selection button to the
: Windshield defroster outlets OFF position when the interior has cooled
to a comfortable temperature and the road
NOTE is no longer dusty. The indicator light will
When the dial is placed in the “ ” or turn off.
“ ” position, the air inlet selection is AUTO: Turn the fan speed control dial and
automatically set to “outside air” air flow control dial to the AUTO position.
mode. The air inlet control is then adjusted
automatically in accordance with the air
& Air inlet selection button temperature inside and outside the pas-
senger compartment, the intensity of sun- The button positions and their functions
light, and other factors. Pressing the air are as follows.
inlet selection button cancels the “AUTO”
ON: The air conditioner operates while the
mode. To return to “AUTO” mode, turn the
fan is running.
fan speed control dial or air flow control
dial to a position other than the AUTO Push the button to select this position. The
position. Then turn to “AUTO” mode. indicator light will illuminate.
SUBARU recommends using the AUTO OFF: The air conditioner does not oper-
position. ate.
Push the button again to select this
WARNING position. The indicator light will turn off.
AUTO: Turn the fan speed control dial and
Continued operation in the ON posi- air flow control dial to the AUTO position.
tion may fog up the windows. Switch The air conditioner compressor operation
ON position (Recirculation): Interior air to the OFF position as soon as the is then adjusted automatically in accor-
is recirculated inside the vehicle. Push the outside dusty condition clears. dance with the air temperature inside and
air inlet selection button to the ON position outside the passenger compartment, the
for fast cooling with the air conditioner or intensity of sunlight, and other factors.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Climate control 4-11
Pressing the button cancels the “AUTO” & Temperature sensors properly and become damaged, the sys-
mode. To return to “AUTO” mode, turn the tem may not be able to control the interior
fan speed control dial or air flow control temperature correctly. To avoid damaging
dial to a position other than the AUTO the sensors, observe the following pre-
position. Then turn to “AUTO” mode. cautions.
SUBARU recommends using the AUTO – Do not subject the sensors to impact.
position. – Keep water away from the sensors.
NOTE – Do not cover the sensors.
The air conditioner’s compressor does The sensors are located as follows.
not operate with an outside tempera- – Solar sensor: beside the windshield
ture of 328F (08C) or lower. defroster grille.
– Interior air temperature sensor: near
the ignition switch.
– Outside temperature sensor: behind
the front grille.
Operating tips for heater and heated interior. This results in quicker system.
cooling by the air conditioner. Keep the
air conditioner windows closed during the operation of & Air conditioner compressor
& Cleaning ventilation grille the air conditioner for maximum cooling shut-off when engine is
efficiency. heavily loaded
To improve acceleration and gas mileage,
& Lubrication oil circulation in the air conditioner compressor is designed
the refrigerant circuit to temporarily shut off during air condi-
Operate the air conditioner compressor at tioner operation whenever the accelerator
a low engine speed (at idle or low driving is fully depressed such as during rapid
speeds) a few minutes each month during acceleration or when driving on a steep
the off-season to circulate its oil. upgrade.
Replace the filter element according to the & Replacing an air filter
replacement schedule as follows. This
schedule should be followed to maintain 1. Remove the glove box.
the filter’s dust collection ability. Under (1) Open the glove box.
extremely dusty conditions, the filter
should be replaced more frequently. It is
recommended that you have your filter
checked or replaced by your SUBARU
dealer. For replacement, use only a
genuine SUBARU air filter kit.
CAUTION
(2) Remove the damper shaft from the
Contact your SUBARU dealer if the glove box.
following occurs, even if it is not yet
time to change the filter:
– Reduction of the air flow through
the vents.
– Windshield gets easily fogged or
misted.
2. Remove the air filter.
NOTE
The filter can influence the air condi-
tioning, heating and defroster perfor-
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
– CONTINUED –
4-14 Climate control
3. Replace the air filter element with a 4. Reinstall the glove box, and connect 1) Service label
new one. the damper shaft. (2) Attach the service label to the
5. Close the glove box. driver’s side door pillar.
CAUTION 6. LABEL installation
The arrow mark on the filter must (1) Fill out the information on the
point UP. service label (small).
1) Caution label
(3) Attach the caution label next to the
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Climate control 4-15
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Audio
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
5-2 Audio
. If you are driving in a tunnel or a . If you are driving in an area with tall
covered parking area trees that block the signal (33 ft (10 m) or
. If you are driving beneath the top level more), for example on a road that goes
of a multi-level freeway through a dense forest
. If you drive under a bridge . The signal can become weak in some
. If you are driving next to a tall vehicle areas that are not covered by the repeater
(such as a truck or a bus) that blocks the station network.
signal Please note that these may be other
The signal comes from the south and may . If you are driving in a valley where the unforeseen circumstances when there
not be able to reach the antenna in some surrounding hills or peaks block the signal are problems with the reception of XMTM
circumstances when you are driving north. from the south satellite radio signals.
. If you are driving on a mountain road
where the southern direction is blocked by
mountains
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
5-4 Audio
Installation of accessories
Always consult your SUBARU dealer
before installing a citizen band radio or
other transmitting device in your vehicle.
Such devices may cause the electronic
control system to malfunction if they are
incorrectly installed or if they are not
suited for the vehicle.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Audio 5-5
Audio set The audio set will operate only when the
ignition switch is in the “Acc” or “ON”
Your SUBARU may be equipped with one of the following audio sets. See the pages position.
indicated in this section for operating details. . Power and sound controls: refer to
page 5-7
& Type A audio set (if equipped) . Radio operation: refer to page 5-10
. Satellite radio operation (if equipped):
refer to page 5-13
. CD (compact disc) player operation:
refer to page 5-17
. AUX unit operation: refer to page 5-25
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
– CONTINUED –
5-6 Audio
& Type B audio set (if equipped) The audio set will operate only when the
ignition switch is in the “Acc” or “ON”
position.
. Power and sound controls: refer to
page 5-7
. Radio operation: refer to page 5-10
. Satellite radio operation (if equipped):
refer to page 5-13
. CD (compact disc) player operation:
refer to page 5-17
. AUX unit operation: refer to page 5-25
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Audio 5-7
Power and sound controls & Sound control ! Other sound setting controls
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
5-10 Audio
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Audio 5-11
! Scan tuning (SCAN) ! PTY (Program type) group tuning ! PTY (Program type) group selection
(only FM reception)
If you press the “SCAN” button, the radio In the PTY selection mode, press the
will switch to the scan mode. In this mode, Press the “PTY/CAT” button to change to “PTY” button “ ” or “ ” to change the
the radio scans through the radio band the PTY selection mode. At this time, the PTY group by one step at a time.
until a station is found. The radio will stop PTY group that you are currently listening Pressing “ ” changes the PTY group up
at the station for 5 seconds while display- to will be displayed for 10 seconds. In the by one step. Pressing “ ” changes the
ing the frequency, after which scanning PTY selection mode, “PTY” is displayed PTY group down by one step.
will continue until the entire band has been on the screen. This operation only changes the display. It
scanned.
does not change the station that is
Press the “SCAN” button again to cancel currently being received.
the SCAN mode and to stop at any
displayed channel.
Automatic tuning may not function prop-
erly if the station reception is weakened by
distance from the station or proximity to
tall buildings and hills.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
– CONTINUED –
5-12 Audio
! Seek in PTY (Program type) group & Displaying radio PS (Pro- & Station preset
gram Service Name) and RT
! How to preset stations
(Radio Text)
1. Press the “FM AM” button to select
FM1, FM2, FM3 or AM reception.
2. Press the “ ” or “ ” side of the
SEEK button or tune the radio manually
until the desired station frequency is
displayed.
3. Press one of the preset buttons for
more than 1.5 seconds to store the
frequency. If the button is pressed for less
than 1.5 seconds, the preceding selection
will remain in memory.
In the PTY selection mode, when the
desired PTY group has been selected, NOTE
pressing the “SEEK” button “ ” or “ ” If the PS (Program Service Name) and/or . If the connection between the radio
seeks within that PTY group. RT (Radio Text) are available, pressing and battery is broken for any reason
Pressing “ ” seeks up. Pressing “ ” the “TEXT” button changes the display such as vehicle maintenance or radio
seeks down. among PS, RT and frequency. The initial removal, all stations stored in the
The control function returns to the normal setting is “PS”. preset buttons are cleared. If this
mode after approximately 10 seconds. occurs, it is necessary to reset the
NOTE preset buttons.
. The maximum number of characters . If a cell phone is placed near the
that can be displayed for PS is 8. radio, it may cause the radio to emit
. The maximum number of characters noise when it receives calls. This noise
that can be displayed for RT is 64. does not indicate a radio fault.
. If RT is 13 characters or longer,
press and hold the “TEXT” button for
0.5 second or longer in order to change
the page.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Audio 5-13
! Selecting preset stations Satellite radio operation (if dealer or visit Sirius Satellite Radio at
www.sirius.com or call 1-888-539-SIRIUS
equipped) (7474) for more information. Sirius, the
To receive satellite radio, it is necessary to Sirius dog logo, channel names and logos
install the SUBARU genuine satellite are trademarks of SIRIUS Satellite Radio
receiver (optional equipment) and to enter Inc.
into a contract. For details, please contact
your SUBARU dealer. & Satellite radio reception
Satellite radio signals are best received in
& XMTM satellite radio areas with a clear view of the open sky. In
XMTM is a continental U.S. based satellite areas where there are tall buildings, trees,
radio service, including music, news, tunnels or other structures that may
sports, talk and children’s programming. obstruct the signal of the satellites, there
XMTM provides digital quality audio and may be signal interruptions. Other circum-
Presetting a station with a preset button text information, including song title and stances that may result in signal loss
allows you to select that station in a single artist name. A service fee is required to include driving near a wall, steep cliff, hill
operation. Up to six AM, FM1, FM2 and receive the XMTM service. For more or driving on the lower level of a multi-
FM3 stations each may be preset. information, contact XMTM at tiered road or inside of a parking garage.
www.xmradio.com or call 1-800-XM- To help reduce this condition, satellite
RADIO (1-800-967-2346) for U.S., radio providers have installed ground-
www.xmradio.ca or 1-877-GET-XMSR (1- based repeaters in heavily populated
877-438-9677) for Canada. areas. However, you may still experience
reception problems in some areas.
& Sirius satellite radio
& Displaying satellite radio ID
Sirius satellite radio is a recent innovation
that allows the listener to experience of tuner
digital sound quality and to have a greater When you activate satellite radio, you
variety of channels. should have your satellite radio tuner ID
Use of satellite radio (Sirius) requires a ready because each tuner is identified by
tuner, antenna and a service contract. For its unique satellite radio tuner ID.
details, please contact your SUBARU The satellite radio ID will be needed when
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
– CONTINUED –
5-14 Audio
you activate satellite radio and receive tion. ! Channel selection (type B)
satellite radio customer support.
The satellite radio ID can be found on the & Channel and category selec-
audio display by tuning the channel to “0”. tion
Turn the “CH” dial to select the satellite
radio channel. ! Channel selection (type A)
NOTE
For Sirius, change the display to an
indication mode other than the channel
number after performing the above
operation.
When in the SAT mode, press the “SEEK” When in the SAT mode, press the “CAT” Press the “SCAN” button to change the
button “ ” or “ ” continuously to button “ ” or “ ” to change to the radio to the SCAN mode. In this mode,
change to the channel selection mode. category search mode. under the selected category, the radio
Pressing the “SEEK” button “ ” changes When in the category search mode, scans through the channel until a station
the channel up by 10 steps each time. pressing the “CAT” button “ ” changes is found. The radio will stop at the station
Pressing “ ” changes the channel down the category up by one step. Pressing “ ” for 5 seconds while displaying the channel
by 10 steps each time. changes the category down by one step. number, after which scanning will continue
When a category is selected, turning the until the entire channel has been scanned
“CH” dial selects channels only within the from the low end to the high end.
selected category. Press the “SCAN” button again to cancel
The control function returns to the normal the SCAN mode and to stop on any
mode after approximately 10 seconds. displayed channel.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
– CONTINUED –
5-16 Audio
NOTE
If the connection between the radio and
battery is broken for any reason such Presetting a channel with a preset button Press the “TEXT” button while receiving
as vehicle maintenance or radio re- allows you to select that channel in a the satellite radio to change the display as
moval, all channels stored in the preset single operation. Up to six SAT1, SAT2 follows.
buttons are cleared. If this occurs, it is and SAT3 channels each may be preset.
necessary to reset the preset buttons.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Audio 5-17
CD player operation & How to insert a CD (type A) no idle position in the magazine.
Hold a disc with a finger in the center hole 2. When the “LOAD” indicator illumi-
NOTE while gripping the edge of the disc, then nates, insert the disc. Once you have
. Make sure to always insert a disc insert it in to the slot (with the label side inserted the disc, the “LOAD” indicator will
with the label side up. If a disc is up) and the player will automatically pull turn off. The disc will then be automatically
inserted with the label side down, the the disc into position. drawn in, and the player will begin to play
player displays “CHECK DISC”. Refer back the first track of the disc.
to “When the following messages are NOTE
. To insert more discs in succession,
displayed” F5-25. DO NOT INSERT TWO DISCS INTO THE repeat Steps 1 and 2. The magazine will
. If a disc is inserted during a radio DISC INSERTION SLOT AT A TIME. be loaded with discs in the ascending
broadcast, the disc will interrupt the order of position number.
broadcast. & How to insert a CD(s) (type B) If you do not insert any disc in 15 seconds
. After the last song finishes, the disc after you have pressed the “LOAD” button,
will automatically return to track 1 (the the player will begin to play back the first
first track on the disc) and will auto- track of the last disc you have inserted.
matically play back.
. The disc indicator steadily lights up if a
. The player is designed to be able to
disc is already inserted in the correspond-
play music CD-Rs and music CD-RWs,
ing position of the magazine.
but it may not be able to play certain
ones. . While the player is in the loading mode,
. CDs (i.e., 8 cm/3 inch CDs) are not if you press “FM/AM”, “SAT” or “AUX”
supported, and if inserted, they will be button, the player will enter the standby
immediately ejected. mode. Press the “CD” button to start
. The file (track) that has protected by playback.
copyright of WMA cannot be played,
and the player will skip to the next file
(track). 1. Briefly press the “LOAD” button. If the
magazine in the player has an idle
position where you can insert a disc, the
disc number indicator associated with the
idle position will blink.
If no indicator blinks, it means that there is
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
– CONTINUED –
5-18 Audio
! Inserting a disc in a desired posi- Press the “CD” button to start playback.
tion ! Loading all the magazine (full disc
loading mode)
Turn the “TRACK” dial counterclockwise Press the “ ” side of the “SEEK” button
to skip to the beginning of the current continuously to fast-reverse the disc/
track/file (track). Each time the dial is folder.
turned, the indicated track/file (track) Press the “ ” side of the “SEEK” button Release the button to stop fast-reversing.
number will decrease. continuously to fast-forward the disc/
folder. NOTE
NOTE Release the button to stop fast-forwarding. If you fast-reverse to the beginning of
In an MP3 or WMA folder, skipping past the first track/file (track), fast-reversing
the first track/file (track) will take you to NOTE will stop and the player will start play-
the last track/file (track) in the folder. If you fast-forward to the end of the last back.
track/file (track), fast-forwarding will
stop and the player will start playback
beginning with the first track/file
(track).
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Audio 5-21
For CD-DA: & Folder selection & How to eject a CD from the
player (type A)
For MP3/WMA:
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
– CONTINUED –
5-24 Audio
& How to eject CDs from the ! Ejecting all discs from the player
player (type B) (all disc ejection mode)
! Ejecting a CD from the player
Of the discs loaded, you can select and
remove only one disc.
NOTE
. Avoid driving the vehicle with a CD
sticking out, because vibration might
make it fall out.
. If you press the “ ” button while
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Audio 5-25
the player is in all disc ejection mode, ! When “CHECK DISC” is displayed AUX unit operation
the mode will be cancelled following Press the eject button to unload the discs.
ejection of the disc that is currently Check that the disc is not damaged or
being ejected. scratched, and also check that the disc is
. If you press the “CD” button or inserted correctly. This message may
“LOAD” button while the player is in appear when using some CD-RW discs.
all disc ejection mode, the player will Check that the disc type (i.e., 8 cm/3 inch
draw in the discs that have been CDs are not supported) and data format
ejected and play them. are correct. This player can only play MP3
and WMA data formats. If the disc cannot
& When the following mes- be unloaded or this message remains
sages are displayed displayed, please contact your SUBARU
If one of the following messages is dealer.
displayed while operating the CD player,
determine the cause based on the follow-
ing information. If you cannot clear those Models without genuine SUBARU naviga-
messages, please contact your SUBARU tion system
dealer. By connecting a commercial audio pro-
! When “PUSH EJECT” is displayed duct to the vehicle, such as a portable
audio player, you can hear its sound via
Press the eject button to unload the disc. the vehicle’s speaker.
Check the disc for damage or deforma-
For the audio input jack, a stereo mini pin
tion, and also check that the correct disc is
plug (3.5ø) can be connected. The con-
inserted. Do not try to unload the disc
nection cable is available at electrical
forcibly. Single CDs (i.e., 8 cm/3 inch CDs)
appliance or similar stores.
are not supported, and if inserted, they will
be immediately ejected and this message To use the AUX unit:
will be displayed. If the disc cannot be 1. Connect a portable audio player to the
unloaded or this message remains dis- AUX jack.
played, please contact your SUBARU
dealer.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
– CONTINUED –
5-26 Audio
volume of the audio set, the volume Audio control buttons (if
becomes louder. However, when you
change from one portable audio player
equipped)
to another one, the volume levels via These buttons are located on the steering
the vehicle’s speakers may be signifi- wheel. They allow the driver to control
cantly loud compared to the prior audio functions without taking his/her
device. To avoid a large volume differ- hands off the steering wheel.
ence, turn down the volume when you
change between portable audio
players.
& MODE button
. In some cases, when the sound
volume of the portable audio player is
low, the sound becomes bad when you
2. Press the AUX input selection button turn up the volume of the vehicle audio
“CD/AUX” on the audio control panel to system. In this case, adjust the sound
turn on the auxiliary audio input. volume of the portable audio player.
3. Play back the portable audio player. . In some cases, noise occurs be-
Refer to the Owner’s Manual of the cause of a bad connection between the
portable audio player. portable player of the vehicle audio
system or for the player.
NOTE
. The AUX jacks of the models with
the genuine SUBARU navigation sys- This button is used to select the desired
tem are the RCA type. For detailed audio mode. Each time it is pressed, the
information, refer to the Owner’s Man- mode changes to the next one in the
ual supplement for the navigation sys- following sequence:
tem.
. The output sound of the portable
audio player is not loud, and the sound
via the vehicle’s speakers that are
connected to the vehicle audio set
*1: The frequency last received in the selected
may be very low. If you turn up the
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Audio 5-27
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Interior equipment
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
6-2 Interior equipment
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Interior equipment 6-3
& Cargo area light & Map light ! Door interlock switch
illuminate when only the rear gate is . Models without genuine SUBARU Sun visors
opened.) navigation system:
. The doors are unlocked using the The setting can be changed by a
remote keyless entry transmitter. SUBARU dealer. Contact your SUBARU
. The ignition switch is turned from the dealer for details.
“Acc” position to the “LOCK” position.
The automatically illuminated map lights
remain on for several seconds and then
gradually turn off after all doors are
closed. While the lights are on, if any of
the following operations are performed,
the map lights turn off immediately.
. The ignition switch is turned from the
“LOCK” position to the “Acc” or “ON”
position. To block out glare, swing down the visors.
. All doors and the rear gate are locked To use the sun visor at a side window,
using the remote keyless entry transmitter. swing it down and move it sideways.
The setting of the period for which the
lights remain on (OFF delay timer) can be
changed as follows.
. Models with genuine SUBARU navi-
gation system:
The setting can be changed using the
navigation monitor. For details, please
refer to the Owner’s Manual supplement
for the navigation system. Also, the setting
can be changed by a SUBARU dealer.
Contact your SUBARU dealer for details.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Interior equipment 6-5
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
– CONTINUED –
6-6 Interior equipment
CAUTION
Do not step or sit on the armrest,
and do not place heavy objects on it.
The armrest could break, and you
could get hurt.
CAUTION
Be careful not to trap your hands
between the console top and con-
sole box when raising and tipping
the console top.
& Overhead console & Rear seat center table (if cup holders.
equipped)
CAUTION
. Do not step or sit on the rear seat
center table, and do not place
heavy objects on it. The rear seat
center table could break, and you
could get hurt.
. When pulling out or returning the
rear seat center table, make sure
not to pinch fingers or other body
parts.
Bottle holders trim can be used to hold beverage bottles Accessory power outlets
and other items.
CAUTION
. Do not pick up a bottle from the
bottle holder or put a bottle in the
holder while you are driving, as
this may distract you and lead to
an accident.
. When placing a beverage in a
door pocket, make sure it is
capped. Otherwise, the beverage
could spill when opening/closing
the door or while driving and, if
the beverage is hot, it could scald Power outlet below the climate controls
you.
ances connected to two outlets simulta- neously, the total power con-
neously, the total power consumed by sumed by them must not ex-
them must not exceed 120W.) ceed 120W.)
Overloading the accessory
CAUTION power outlet can cause a short
. Do not attempt to use a cigarette circuit. Do not use dual adapters
lighter in the accessory power or more than one electrical appli-
outlets. ance.
. Do not place any foreign objects, . If the plug on your electric appli-
especially metal ones such as ance is either too loose or too
coins or aluminum foil, into the tight for the accessory power
accessory power outlet. That outlet, this can result in a poor
Power outlet in the cargo area could cause a short circuit. Al- contact or cause the plug to get
ways put the cap on the acces- stuck. Only use plugs that fit
Accessory power outlets are provided properly.
below the climate controls, in the center sory power outlet when it is not
console and in the cargo area. Electrical in use. . Use of an electric appliance in the
power (12V DC) from the battery is . Use only electrical appliances accessory power outlet for a long
available at any of the outlets when the which are designed for 12V DC. period of time while the engine is
ignition switch is in either the “Acc” or “ON” not running can cause battery
The maximum power rating of an discharge.
position. appliance that can be connected
You can use an in-vehicle electrical varies among outlets as shown in . Before driving your vehicle, make
appliance by connecting it to an outlet. the following list. Do not use an sure that the plug and the cord
The maximum power rating of an appli- appliance which exceeds the in- on your electrical appliance will
ance that can be connected varies among dicated wattage for each outlet. not interfere with your shifting
outlets as shown in the following list. Do gears and operating the accel-
– Outlet below the climate con- erator and brake pedals. If they
not use an appliance which exceeds the trols: 80W or less
indicated wattage for each outlet. do, do not use the electrical
– Outlets in the center console appliance while driving.
. Outlet below the climate controls: 80W and cargo area: 120W or less
or less (When using appliances con-
. Outlets in the center console and cargo nected to two outlets simulta-
area: 120W or less (When using appli-
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Interior equipment 6-11
& Use with a cigarette lighter circuit and overheating, resulting Ashtray (if equipped)
(dealer option) in a fire.
To use the accessory power outlet as a . If the socket is ever used for a
cigarette lighter socket, purchase the plug-in accessory such as a cell CAUTION
cigarette lighter plug, which is an optional phone, that may damage the
Do not use ashtrays as waste re-
accessory. portion of the socket’s internal
ceptacles or leave a lighted cigarette
A cigarette lighter plug is available from mechanism that causes a cigar-
in an ashtray. This could cause a
your SUBARU dealer. ette lighter plug to “pop out”
fire.
after its lighter element is heated.
The cigarette lighter operates only when
Therefore, do not place a cigar-
the ignition switch is in the “ON” or “Acc”
ette lighter plug in a socket that
position.
has been used, even once, to
To use the cigarette lighter, push in the power a plug-in accessory. Doing
knob and wait a few moments. It will so may cause the plug to stick
automatically spring up when ready for and overheat, creating a potential
use. fire hazard.
WARNING
To avoid being burned, never grasp
the lighter by the end with the
heating element. Doing so could
result in injury and could also
damage the heating element. A portable ashtray is available from your
SUBARU dealer.
CAUTION When using the ashtray, open the ashtray
lid. Fully close the lid after using it to help
. Do not hold the lighter pushed in, reduce residual smoke.
because it will overheat.
NOTE
. Do not use a non-genuine cigar-
ette lighter plug in the socket. Particles of ash and tobacco will accu-
Doing so may cause a short- mulate around the hinges of the ash-
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
– CONTINUED –
6-12 Interior equipment
tray’s inner lid. Clean them off using a Floor mat Shopping bag hook
toothbrush or another narrow-ended
implement. A retaining pin is located on the driver’s
side floor. CAUTION
The floor mat is secured using the built-in
Do not hang items on the shopping
grommets, by placing the grommets over
bag hook that weigh 6 lbs (3 kg) or
the pins and pushing them downward.
more.
CAUTION
A shopping bag hook is attached to each
Make sure the driver’s floor mat is side of the cargo area.
placed back in its proper location
and correctly secured on its retain-
ing pins. Also, do not use more than
one floor mat. If the floor mat slips
forward and interferes with the
movement of the pedals during
driving, it could cause an accident.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Interior equipment 6-13
of gas from the stays, which may & To remove the cover & To install the cover housing
result in their inability to hold the
1. Rewind the cover.
rear gate open.
. If the vehicle is equipped with a
reclining rear seatback feature,
when reclining the rear seatback,
move the front cover backward
so that the cover is not damaged.
both ends of the sleeve into the recesses Cargo tie-down hooks CAUTION
of the retainers.
The cargo tie-down hooks are de-
signed only for securing light cargo.
Never try to secure cargo that
exceeds the capacity of the hooks.
The maximum load capacity is 44
lbs (20 kg) per hook.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
6-16 Interior equipment
CAUTION
. Always keep the lids closed while
driving to reduce the risk of
injury in the event of a sudden
stop or an accident.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Starting and operating
Cruise control indicator light .............................. 7-39 Cruise control set indicator light ........................ 7-39
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Starting and operating 7-3
Fuel than 91 AKI) is used, knocking, re- emission performance with gasoline that
duced output and poor accelerator meets the clean burning low-sulfur Cali-
response will result. fornia gasoline specifications. If you live in
CAUTION any other state than California, your
! Fuel octane rating vehicle will operate on gasoline meeting
Use of a fuel which is low in quality This octane rating is the average of the Federal specifications. Gasoline sold out-
or use of an inappropriate fuel Research Octane and Motor Octane side California is permitted to have higher
additive may cause engine damage. numbers and is commonly referred to as sulfur levels, which may affect the perfor-
the Anti Knock Index (AKI). mance of your vehicle’s catalytic converter
Using a gasoline with a lower octane and may produce a sulfur exhaust odor or
& Fuel requirements rating can cause persistent and heavy smell. SUBARU recommends that you try
knocking, which can damage the engine. a different brand of unleaded gasoline
! Non-turbo models
Do not be concerned if your vehicle having lower sulfur to determine if the
The 2.5-liter non-turbo engine is designed sometimes knocks lightly when you drive problem is fuel related before returning
to operate using unleaded gasoline with up a hill or when you accelerate. Contact your vehicle to an authorized dealer for
an octane rating of 87 AKI or higher. your SUBARU dealer if you use a fuel with service.
! Turbo models the specified octane rating and your ! MMT
The 2.5-liter turbo engine is designed to vehicle knocks heavily or persistently.
Some gasoline contains an octane-en-
operate using premium unleaded gaso- ! Unleaded gasoline hancing additive called MMT (Methylcy-
line with an octane rating of 91 AKI or The neck of the fuel filler pipe is designed clopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl). If
higher. If premium unleaded gasoline is to accept only an unleaded gasoline filler you use such fuels, your emission control
not available, regular unleaded gasoline nozzle. Under no circumstances should system performance may deteriorate and
with an octane rating of 87 AKI or higher leaded gasoline be used because it will the CHECK ENGINE warning light/Mal-
may be temporarily used. For optimum damage the emission control system and function indicator lamp may turn on. If this
engine performance and driveability, it is may impair driveability and fuel economy. happens, return to your authorized
required that you use premium grade SUBARU Dealer for service. If it is
unleaded gasoline. ! Gasoline for California-certified
determined that the condition is caused
LEV
by the type of fuel used, repairs may not
NOTE If your vehicle was certified to California’s be covered by your warranty.
Be sure to use premium unleaded low emission vehicle (LEV) standards as
gasoline of 91 AKI or higher for turbo indicated on the underhood tune-up label,
engine models. If other gasoline (lower it is designed to optimize engine and
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
– CONTINUED –
7-4 Starting and operating
! Gasoline for cleaner air been reformulated to reduce vehicle emis- fuel may damage the paint, be sure
Your use of gasoline with detergent sions. to wipe off any spilled fuel quickly.
additives will help prevent deposits from Paint damage caused by spilled fuel
As additional guidance, only use fuels
forming in your engine and fuel system. is not covered under the SUBARU
suited for your vehicle as explained in the
This helps keep your engine in tune and Limited Warranty.
following description.
your emission control system working . Fuel should be unleaded and have an
properly, and is a way of doing your part octane rating no lower than that specified
for cleaner air. If you continuously use a in this manual.
& Fuel filler lid and cap
high quality fuel with the proper detergent
. Methanol (methyl or wood alcohol) is ! Refueling
and other additives, you should never
sometimes mixed with unleaded gasoline. Only one person should be involved in
need to add any fuel system cleaning
Methanol can be used in your vehicle refueling. Do not allow others to approach
agents to your fuel tank.
ONLY if it does not exceed 5% of the fuel the area of the vehicle near the fuel filler
Many gasolines are now blended with mixture AND if it is accompanied by pipe while refueling is in progress.
materials called oxygenates. Use of these sufficient quantities of the proper cosol- Be sure to observe any other precautions
fuels can also help keep the air cleaner. vents and corrosion inhibitors required to that are posted at the service station.
Oxygenated blend fuels, such as MTBE prevent damage to the fuel system. Do not
(Methyl Tertiary Butyl ether) or ethanol use fuel containing methanol EXCEPT
(ethyl or grain alcohol) may be used in under these conditions.
your vehicle, but should contain no more . If undesirable driveability problems are
than 15% MTBE or 10% ethanol for the experienced and you suspect they may be
proper operation of your SUBARU. fuel related, try a different brand of gaso-
line before seeking service at your
In addition, some gasoline suppliers are
SUBARU dealer.
now producing reformulated gasolines,
which are designed to reduce vehicle . Fuel system damage or driveability
emissions. SUBARU approves the use of problems which result from the use of
reformulated gasoline. improper fuel are not covered under the
SUBARU Limited Warranty.
If you are not sure what the fuel contains,
you should ask your service station CAUTION
operators if their gasolines contain deter-
gents and oxygenates and if they have Do not let fuel spill on the exterior
surfaces of the vehicle. Because
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Starting and operating 7-5
trouble codes, and the OBD system Preparing to drive Starting the engine
readiness monitors are complete.
. A vehicle fails the OBD inspection if the You should perform the following checks
“CHECK ENGINE” warning light/MIL is and adjustments every day before you CAUTION
not properly operating or there are one or start driving.
more diagnostic trouble codes stored in Do not operate the starter motor
1. Check that all windows, mirrors, and
the vehicle’s computer with the “CHECK continuously for more than 10 sec-
lights are clean and unobstructed.
ENGINE” warning light/MIL illuminated. onds. If the engine fails to start after
2. Check the appearance and condition operating the starter for 5 to 10
. A state emission inspection may reject of the tires. Also check tires for proper
(not pass or fail) a vehicle if the number of seconds, wait for 10 seconds or
inflation. more before trying again.
OBD system readiness monitors “Not 3. Look under the vehicle for any sign of
Ready” is greater than one. Under this leaks.
condition, the vehicle operator should be
instructed to drive his/her vehicle for a few
4. Check that the hood and rear gate are & Manual transmission model
fully closed.
days to set the monitors and return for an 1. Apply the parking brake.
emission re-inspection. 5. Check the adjustment of the seat.
2. Turn off unnecessary lights and ac-
. Owners of rejected or failing vehicles 6. Check the adjustment of the inside cessories.
should contact their SUBARU Dealer for and outside mirrors.
3. Press the clutch pedal to the floor and
service. 7. Fasten your seatbelt. Check that your shift the shift lever into neutral. Hold the
passengers have fastened their seatbelts. clutch pedal to the floor while starting the
8. Check the operation of the warning engine.
and indicator lights when the ignition The starter motor will only operate when
switch is turned to the “ON” position. the clutch pedal is pressed fully to the
9. Check the gauges, indicator and warn- floor.
ing lights after starting the engine. 4. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”
position and check the operation of the
NOTE warning and indicator lights. Refer to
Engine oil, engine coolant, brake fluid, “Warning and indicator lights” F3-9.
washer fluid and other fluid levels 5. Turn the ignition switch to the “START”
should be checked daily, weekly or at position without depressing the accelera-
fuel stops. tor pedal. Release the key immediately
after the engine has started.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Starting and operating 7-9
If the engine does not start, try the engine warms up. position and check the operation of the
following. warning and indicator lights. Refer to
(1) Turn the ignition switch to the NOTE “Warning and indicator lights” F3-9.
“OFF” position and wait for at least 5. Turn the ignition switch to the “START”
. The engine may be difficult to start
10 seconds. After checking that the position without depressing the accelera-
when the battery has been discon-
parking brake is firmly set, turn the tor pedal. Release the key immediately
nected and reconnected (for mainte-
ignition switch to the “START” position after the engine has started.
nance or other purposes). This diffi-
while depressing the accelerator pedal
culty is caused by the electronically If the engine does not start, try the
slightly (approximately a quarter of the
controlled throttle’s self-diagnosis following.
full stroke). Release the accelerator
function. To overcome it, keep the (1) Turn the ignition switch to the
pedal as soon as the engine starts.
ignition switch in the “ON” position “OFF” position and wait for at least
(2) If this fails to start the engine, turn for approximately 10 seconds before
the ignition switch back to the “OFF” 10 seconds. After checking that the
starting the engine. parking brake is firmly set, turn the
position and wait for at least 10 . For non-turbo models, to protect the
seconds. Then fully depress the accel- ignition switch to the “START” position
engine while the shift lever is in the while depressing the accelerator pedal
erator pedal and turn the ignition neutral position, the engine is con-
switch to the “START” position. If the slightly (approximately a quarter of the
trolled so that the engine speed may full stroke). Release the accelerator
engine starts, quickly release the not become too high even if the accel-
accelerator pedal. pedal as soon as the engine starts.
erator pedal is depressed hard. (2) If this fails to start the engine, turn
(3) If this fails to start the engine, turn
the ignition switch back to the “OFF”
the ignition switch again to the “OFF” & Automatic transmission position and wait for at least 10
position. After waiting for 10 seconds model
or longer, turn the ignition switch to the seconds. Then fully depress the accel-
“START” position without depressing 1. Apply the parking brake. erator pedal and turn the ignition
the accelerator pedal. 2. Turn off unnecessary lights and ac- switch to the “START” position. If the
(4) If the engine still refuses to start, cessories. engine starts, quickly release the
contact your nearest SUBARU dealer 3. Shift the selector lever to the “P” or “N” accelerator pedal.
for assistance. position (preferably “P” position). (3) If this fails to start the engine, turn
the ignition switch again to the “OFF”
6. Confirm that all warning and indicator The starter motor will only operate when
position. After waiting for 10 seconds
lights have gone off after the engine has the selector lever is at the “P” or “N”
or longer, turn the ignition switch to the
started. The fuel injection system auto- position.
“START” position without depressing
matically lowers the idle speed as the 4. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON” the accelerator pedal.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
– CONTINUED –
7-10 Starting and operating
(4) If the engine still refuses to start, for approximately 10 seconds before Stopping the engine
contact your nearest SUBARU dealer starting the engine.
for assistance. . For non-turbo models, to protect the The ignition switch should be turned off
6. Confirm that all warning and indicator engine while the selector lever is in the only when the vehicle is stopped and the
lights have gone out after the engine has “P” or “N” position, the engine is engine is idling.
started. The fuel injection system auto- controlled so that the engine speed
matically lowers the idle speed as the may not become too high even if the WARNING
engine warms up. accelerator pedal is depressed hard.
Do not stop the engine when the
While the engine is warming up, make vehicle is moving. This will cause
sure that the selector lever is at the “P” or loss of power to the power steering
“N” position and that the parking brake is and the brake booster, making steer-
applied. ing and braking more difficult. It
could also result in accidental acti-
CAUTION vation of the “LOCK” position on the
ignition switch, causing the steering
If you restart the engine while the wheel to lock.
vehicle is moving, shift the selector
lever into the “N” position. Do not
attempt to place the selector lever of
a moving vehicle into the “P” posi-
tion.
NOTE
. The engine may be difficult to start
when the battery has been discon-
nected and reconnected (for mainte-
nance or other purposes). This diffi-
culty is caused by the electronically
controlled throttle’s self-diagnosis
function. To overcome it, keep the
ignition switch in the “ON” position
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Starting and operating 7-11
Remote engine start system an additional four times. If the vehicle fails
to start after the additional attempts, the
(dealer option) remote engine start system will abort and
return to a non-activated state.
WARNING
& Remote start safety features
. Do not remote start a vehicle in For safety and security reasons, the
an enclosed environment (e.g., in system will fail to start and beep the horn
a closed garage). Prolonged op- twice or shut down the engine during
eration of a motor vehicle in an remote start operation if any of the
enclosed environment can cause following conditions occur.
a harmful build-up of Carbon
. The brake pedal is pressed before the
Monoxide. Carbon Monoxide is
vehicle ignition switch is turned “on”.
harmful to your health. Exposure
to high levels of Carbon Monox- & Starting your vehicle . The key was already in the ignition
ide can cause headaches, dizzi- switch.
The remote control start system is acti- . The engine hood is opened.
ness or in extreme cases uncon- vated by pressing the “ ” button twice
sciousness and/or death. within 3 seconds on your remote control . The vehicle’s engine idle speed has
. Before performing any servicing transmitter. The system will check certain reached a level over 3,000 rpm.
of the vehicle, temporarily place pre-conditions before starting, and if all . The alarm is triggered by opening a
the remote engine start system in safety parameters are correct, the engine door or the rear gate.
service mode to prevent the will start within 5 seconds. While the
system from unexpectedly start- vehicle is operating via remote engine
NOTE
ing the engine. start, the vehicle’s power window features . The security indicator light on the
will be disabled. Also, the system has a dashboard will stop flashing while
timer and will shut down after 15 minutes if under remote engine start operation,
you do not operate the vehicle. Press and but the vehicle is still protected.
hold the “ ” button for 2 seconds again to . If the vehicle is entered during
turn the vehicle off. If the vehicle’s starter remote engine start operation, the
cranks but does not start or starts and system will not record entry in the
stalls, the remote engine start system will alarm history.
power off then attempt to start the vehicle
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
– CONTINUED –
7-12 Starting and operating
& Entering the vehicle while it transmitter within a few seconds immedi- start.
is running via remote start ately following remote engine start shut- ! To disengage the service mode
down.
1. Unlock the vehicle doors using the Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”
position, depress and hold the brake
keyless entry system. If the vehicle’s & Pre-heating or pre-cooling pedal, then press and release the “ ”
doors are unlocked manually using the
key, the vehicle’s alarm system will trigger
the interior of the vehicle button on the remote control transmitter
and the remote engine start system will Before exiting the vehicle, set the tem- three times. The system will pause for 1
turn off. Inserting the key into the ignition perature controls to the desired setting second and flash the turn signal lights 1
switch and turning it to the “ON” position or and operation. After the system starts the time indicating that the system has exited
pressing the unlock button “ ” on the vehicle, the heater or air-conditioning will service mode.
remote keyless entry transmitter will dis- activate and heat or cool the interior to
arm the alarm system. Refer to “Alarm your setting. NOTE
system” F2-14. When taking your vehicle in for service,
2. Enter the vehicle. Do not depress the & Service mode it is recommended that you inform the
brake pedal. In service mode, the remote start function service personnel that your vehicle is
3. Insert the key into the ignition switch is temporarily disabled to prevent the equipped with a remote control start
and turn to the “ON” position. If the ignition system from unexpectedly starting the system.
switch is accidentally turned to the engine while being serviced.
“START” position, the system’s “starter ! To engage the service mode & Remote transmitter program-
anti-grind” feature will prevent the starter ming and programmable fea-
from re-cranking. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”
position, depress and hold the brake
ture option
4. Depress the brake pedal. The remote
starter disengages, the vehicle’s power pedal, then press and release the “ ” New transmitters can be programmed to
button on the remote control transmitter the engine starter system in the event that
window features are re-enabled and the remote transmitters are lost, stolen or
vehicle will operate normally. three times. The system will pause for 1
second and then flash the turn signal damaged. The remote engine start system
lights and honk the horn three times also has one programmable feature that
& Entering the vehicle follow- indicating that the system is in service can be adjusted for user preference.
ing remote engine start shut- mode. When attempting to activate the The remote engine starter system can be
down remote start system while in service programmed to either make an audible
An alarm trigger may occur if the vehicle is mode, the turn signal lights will flash and horn chirp upon remote start activation or
opened by the remote keyless entry the horn will honk two times and will not not. Remote transmitter programming and
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Starting and operating 7-13
feature programming can be adjusted Pressing the brake pedal repeatedly will tery.
using the following procedure. toggle the feature ON or OFF each time. . Batteries should not be exposed
1. Open the driver’s door (the driver’s 7. To exit the remote transmitter and to excessive heat such as sun-
door must remain opened throughout the feature programming mode, turn the igni- shine, fire or the like.
entire process). tion switch to the “LOCK” position, remove
2. Insert the key into the vehicle’s ignition the key from the ignition switch and test The two 3-volt lithium batteries (model
switch and turn to the “ON” position. operation of the remote transmitter(s) and CR-1220) supplied in your remote control
3. Locate the small black programming horn confirmation feature. should last approximately 3 years, de-
button behind the fuse box cover, on the pending on usage. When the batteries
driver’s side left under the dashboard & System maintenance begin to weaken, you will notice a
panel. decrease in range (distance from the
! Changing the remote control bat- vehicle that your remote control operates).
4. Press and hold the black programming teries
button for 10 to 15 seconds. The horn will Follow the instructions below to change
honk and the turn signal lights will flash the remote control batteries.
three times to indicate that the system has
CAUTION
entered programming mode. At this point . Do not let dust, oil or water get on
you can proceed to either step 5 or step 6. or in the remote engine start
5. To program a remote transmitter: transmitter when replacing the
press and release the “ ” button on each battery.
transmitter. The horn will honk and the . Be careful not to damage the
turn signal lights will flash one time to printed circuit board in the re-
indicate a successful transmitter learn mote engine start transmitter
each time the “ ” button is pressed. You when replacing the battery.
can program up to eight transmitters.
6. To toggle the Horn Confirmation chirps . Be careful not to allow children to
ON/OFF: press and release the brake to touch the battery and any re-
toggle the feature. The horn will chirp and moved parts; children could
the turn signal lights will flash one time to swallow them.
indicate Confirmation Horn Chirps are . There is a danger of explosion if
“OFF”. The horn will honk and the turn an incorrect replacement battery
signal lights will flash 2 times to indicate is used. Replace only with the
Confirmation Horn Chirps are “ON”. same or equivalent type of bat-
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
– CONTINUED –
7-14 Starting and operating
1. Carefully pry the remote control halves 2. Remove the circuit board from the
apart using a small flat-head screwdriver. bottom half of the case and slide the white
plastic battery holder out from under the
battery tab releasing the batteries. Re-
move the old batteries and replace with
new ones. Be sure to observe the (+) sign
on the old batteries before removing them
to ensure that the new batteries are
inserted properly (battery “+” should be
pointed away from the transmitter circuit
board on both batteries).
3. Carefully snap the case halves back
together, then test the remote control.
NOTE
This device complies with Part 15 of
the FCC Rules and with RSS-210 of
Industry Canada. Operation is subject
to the following two conditions: (1) This
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Starting and operating 7-15
Never exceed the posted speed limit. speed due to slow traffic, turning corners, Automatic transmission
or driving up steep hills, downshift to a
WARNING lower gear before the engine starts to The automatic transmission is electroni-
labor. cally controlled and provides 4 forward
When shifting down a gear, ensure
On steep downgrades, downshift the speeds and 1 reverse speed. Also, it has a
that the vehicle is not travelling at a
transmission to 4th, 3rd or 2nd gear as manual mode and a SPORT mode.
speed exceeding the Maximum Al-
lowable Speed for the gear which is necessary; this helps to maintain a safe
speed and to extend brake pad life.
WARNING
about to be selected. Failure to
observe this precaution can lead to In this way, the engine provides a braking Do not shift from the “P” or “N”
engine over-revving and this in turn effect. Remember, if you “ride” (over use) position into the “D” or “R” position
can result in engine damage. the brakes while descending a hill, they while depressing the accelerator
In addition, sudden application of may overheat and not work properly. pedal. This may cause the vehicle
engine brakes when the vehicle is The engine may, on rare occasions, knock to jump forward or backward.
travelling on a slippery surface can when the vehicle rapidly accelerates or
lead to wheel locking; as a conse- rapidly pulls away from a standstill. This
quence, control of the vehicle may CAUTION
phenomenon is not an indication of a
be lost and the risk of an accident problem in your vehicle.
increased. . Shift into the “P” or “R” position
only after the vehicle is comple-
tely stopped. Shifting while the
vehicle is moving may cause
& Driving tips damage to the transmission.
Do not drive with your foot resting on the . Do not race the engine for more
clutch pedal and do not use the clutch to than 5 seconds in any position
hold your vehicle at a standstill on an except the “N” or “P” position
upgrade. Either of those actions may when the brake is set or when
cause clutch damage. chocks are used in the wheels.
Do not drive with your hand resting on the This may cause the automatic
shift lever. This may cause wear on the transmission fluid to overheat.
transmission components.
. Avoid shifting from one of the
When it is necessary to reduce vehicle forward driving positions into the
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Starting and operating 7-17
“R” position or vice versa until allow the transmission to shift at the chanically locked to prevent the vehicle
the vehicle has completely most appropriate times for the current from rolling freely.
stopped. Such shifting may condition of your vehicle. Optimized
shifting will be restored as the vehicle When you park the vehicle, first set the
cause damage to the transmis-
continues to be driven for a while. parking brake fully, then shift into the “P”
sion.
position. Do not hold the vehicle with only
. When parking the vehicle, first the transmission.
securely apply the parking brake & Selector lever
and then place the selector lever To shift the selector lever from the “P” to
in the “P” position. Avoid parking any other position, you should depress the
for a long time with the selector brake pedal fully then move the selector
lever in any other position as lever. This prevents the vehicle from
doing so could result in a dead lurching when it is started.
battery. ! R (Reverse)
This position is for backing the vehicle.
NOTE To shift from the “N” to “R” position, stop
. When the engine coolant tempera- the vehicle completely then move the
ture is still low, the automatic transmis- lever to the “R” position.
sion will upshift to higher engine When the ignition switch has been turned
speeds than when the coolant tempera- to the “LOCK” position, movement of the
ture is sufficiently high in order to : Shift possible with brake pedal de- selector lever from the “N” position to the
shorten the warm-up time and improve pressed “R” position is possible for a limited time
driveability. The gearshift timing will : Shift possible with brake pedal not period by depressing the brake pedal, and
automatically shift to the normal timing depressed then it becomes impossible. For details,
after the engine has warmed up. refer to “Selector lever reverse inhibiting
The selector lever has four positions, “P”,
. Immediately after ATF (automatic function” F7-18.
“R”, “N”, “D” and also has manual gate for
transmission fluid) is replaced, you
using “SPORT” mode or manual mode. ! N (Neutral)
may feel that the automatic transmis-
sion operation is somewhat unusual. ! P (Park) This position is for restarting a stalled
This results from invalidation of data This position is for parking the vehicle and engine.
which the on-board computer has starting the engine. In this position the wheels and transmis-
collected and stored in memory to In this position, the transmission is me- sion are not locked. In this position, the
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
– CONTINUED –
7-18 Starting and operating
transmission is neutral; the vehicle will roll you require. ! While going down a hill
freely, even on the slightest incline unless
When more acceleration is required in this When you are descending a hill or any
the parking brake or foot brake is on.
position, depress the accelerator pedal other slope while braking with the
Avoid coasting with the transmission in fully to the floor and hold that position. The “SPORT” mode selected, the transmission
neutral. transmission will automatically downshift may downshift to 3rd or 2nd gear depend-
During coasting, there is no engine brak- to 3rd, 2nd or 1st gear. When you release ing on how hard you depress the brake
ing effect. the pedal, the transmission will return to pedal, causing engine braking to work.
the original gear position. Reacceleration for a short time will cause
NOTE the transmission to upshift normally.
To use the “SPORT” mode, move the lever
If the selector lever is in the “N”
from this position into the manual gate. To
position when you stop the engine for
use the manual mode, move the lever
NOTE
parking, you may not subsequently be
from this position into the manual gate . A 4th-to-3rd automatic downshift
able to move it to the “R” and “P” will not occur at speeds above 50
then move it toward the “+” and “−” ends.
positions. If this happens, turn the mph (80 km/h) and a 3rd-to-2nd auto-
ignition switch to the “ON” position. ! While climbing a grade matic downshift will not occur at
You will then be able to move the When driving up a hill, undesired upshift to speeds above 24 mph (38 km/h).
selector lever to the “P” position. 4th gear is prevented from taking place . Automatic downshifts to 3rd or 2nd
when the accelerator is released. This may occur even when driving on a level
WARNING minimizes the chance of subsequent road depending on conditions, such as
downshifting to a lower gear when accel- how hard you depress the brake pedal.
Do not drive the vehicle with the erating again. This prevents repeated
selector lever in the “N” (neutral)
position. Engine braking has no
upshifting and downshifting resulting in a & Selector lever reverse inhi-
smoother operation of the vehicle. biting function
effect in this condition and the risk
of an accident is consequently in- NOTE This function prevents accidental move-
creased. The transmission may downshift to 2nd ment of the selector lever to the “R”
or 1st gear, depending on the way the position while the vehicle is moving.
! D (Drive) accelerator pedal is pressed to accel- The function becomes operational when
This position is for normal driving. erate the vehicle again. the vehicle reaches a speed of approxi-
mately 6 mph (10 km/h). Once opera-
The transmission automatically shifts into tional, it prevents the selector lever from
a suitable gear from 1st to 4th according to being moved from the “N” position to the
the vehicle speed and the acceleration
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Starting and operating 7-19
“R” position. When the vehicle speed ! Selector lever release button & Selection of manual mode
drops below 5 mph (8 km/h), the function
is canceled. The selector lever can then
be moved to the “R” and “P” positions.
When the ignition switch has been turned
to the “LOCK” position, movement of the
selector lever from the “N” position to the
“R” position is possible for a limited time
period by depressing the brake pedal and
then becomes impossible. Also, the se-
lector lever cannot be moved to the “R”
position after it has been placed in the “P”
position and then placed again in the “N”
position.
When the movement of the selector lever If you inadvertently have turned the igni- With the vehicle either moving or station-
from the “N” position to the “R” position tion switch to the “LOCK” position with the ary, move the selector lever from the “D”
has become impossible, turn the ignition selector lever in the “N” position, proceed position to the manual gate then move it to
switch back to the “ON” position then as follows. By referring to “Shift lock the “+” end or “−” end of the manual gate
move the selector lever to the “P” position. release” F7-22, remove the shift lock to select manual mode.
Pressing the selector lever release button release cover. Then, with a screwdriver
also makes it possible to move the inserted into the hole, move the selector
selector lever to the “P” position at this lever to the “P” position. If the selector
time. lever reverse inhibiting function fails, have
the vehicle inspected by the nearest
SUBARU dealer.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
– CONTINUED –
7-20 Starting and operating
In addition, sudden application of Turbo models position on an uphill grade by using the
engine braking caused by down mph (km/h) “D” position. Use the brake instead.
shifting when the vehicle is travel- Gear position Manual mode . The engine may, on rare occasions,
ling on a slippery surface can lead 1 36 (58) knock when the vehicle rapidly acceler-
to wheel locking; as a consequence, ates or rapidly pulls away from a standstill.
control of the vehicle may be lost 2 66 (106) This phenomenon does not indicate a
and the risk of an accident in- 3 107 (172) problem.
creased.
NOTE & SPORT mode
The following tables show the maximum In order to prevent over-revving during
speeds that are possible with each differ- deceleration of the vehicle, the trans-
ent gear. mission will remain in the current gear
if the speed of the vehicle is in excess
When down shifting, it is important to of the Maximum Allowable Speed for
confirm that the current vehicle speed is the gear to which the selector lever has
not in excess of the Maximum Allowable been moved.
Speed of the gear which is about to be
selected.
& Driving tips
Non-turbo models
mph (km/h)
. On a road surface where there is a risk
of wheelspin (for example, a snow- or
Gear position Manual mode
gravel-covered road), you can pull away
1 30 (48) from a standstill (safely and easily) by first
2 63 (101) selecting the 2nd gear of the manual SPORT mode is used when power is
mode. needed for rapid acceleration or for uphill
3 99 (160)
. Always apply the foot or parking brake driving. To select this mode, move the
when the vehicle is stopped in the “D” or selector lever from the “D” position to the
“R” position. manual gate.
. Always set the parking brake when
parking your vehicle. Do not hold the
vehicle with only the transmission.
. Do not keep the vehicle in a stationary
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
– CONTINUED –
7-22 Starting and operating
When selected, the SPORT mode indica- 4. Insert the screwdriver into the hole.
tor light on the combination meter will turn 5. Push down on the screwdriver and
on. move the selector lever from the “P” to the
To deselect SPORT mode, move the “N” position.
selector lever to the “D” position or select 6. Remove the screwdriver from the hole.
manual mode. Depress the brake pedal and start the
To subsequently reselect SPORT mode, engine.
move the selector lever to the “D” position
and from there to the manual gate. Take your vehicle to the nearest SUBARU
In this mode, the transmission shifts up at dealer immediately to have the system
higher vehicle speeds and shifts down repaired.
more responsively than in normal mode. 3. Remove the cover by prying on the
edge with a flat-head screwdriver.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Starting and operating 7-23
! Brake assist system cate any malfunctions, and the brake ABS (Anti-lock Brake Sys-
assist system is operating properly.
tem)
WARNING . You might feel that the brake pedal
is applied by lighter force and gener- The ABS system prevents the lock-up of
Do not be overconfident about the ates a greater braking force. wheels which may occur during sudden
brake assist. It is not a system that . You might hear clicking (knocking) braking or braking on slippery road sur-
brings more braking ability to the sounds around brake pedal. faces. This helps prevent the loss of
vehicle beyond its braking capabil- steering control and directional stability
ity. Always use the utmost care
when driving regarding vehicle & Disc brake pad wear warning caused by wheel lock-up.
speed and safe distance. indicators When the ABS system is operating, you
may hear a chattering noise or feel a slight
vibration in the brake pedal. This is normal
CAUTION when the ABS operates.
When you need to brake suddenly, The ABS system will not operate when the
continue depressing the brake pedal vehicle speed is below approximately 6
strongly to bring the effect of the mph (10 km/h).
brake assist.
WARNING
Brake assist is a driver assistance system.
It assists the brake power when the driver Always use the utmost care in
cannot depress the brake pedal strongly driving – overconfidence because
and the brake power is insufficient. you are driving with an ABS
equipped vehicle could easily lead
Brake assist generates the brake power to a serious accident.
The disc brake pad wear warning indica-
according to the speed at which the driver
tors on the disc brakes give a warning
depresses the brake pedal.
noise when the brake pads are worn.
NOTE If a squeaking or scraping noise is heard CAUTION
from the disc brakes while braking, im-
When you depress the brake pedal . The ABS system does not always
strongly or suddenly, the following mediately have your vehicle checked by
decrease stopping distance. You
phenomena occur. However, even your SUBARU dealer.
should always maintain a safe
though these occur, they do not indi- following distance from other
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Starting and operating 7-25
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
– CONTINUED –
7-26 Starting and operating
NOTE Electronic Brake Force Dis- & Steps to take if EBD system
If the warning light behavior is as tribution (EBD) system malfunctions
described below, the ABS system may
be considered normal. The EBD system maximizes the effective-
. The warning light illuminates right ness of the brakes by allowing the rear
after the engine is started but turns off brakes to supply a greater proportion of
immediately, remaining off. the braking force. It functions by adjusting
. The warning light remains on after the distribution of braking force to the rear
the engine has been started, but it wheels in accordance with the vehicle’s
turns off when the vehicle speed loading condition and speed.
reaches approximately 8 mph (12
km/h). The EBD system is an integral part of the
. The warning light illuminates during ABS system and uses some of the ABS
driving, but it turns off immediately and system’s components to perform its func-
remains off. tion of optimizing the distribution of brak-
ing force. If any of the ABS components
used by the EBD system malfunction, the If a malfunction occurs in the EBD system,
EBD system also stops working. the system stops working and the brake
system warning light and ABS warning
When the EBD system is operating, you light illuminate simultaneously.
may hear a chattering noise or feel a slight
vibration in the brake pedal. This is normal The EBD system may be malfunctioning if
and does not indicate a malfunction. the brake system warning light and ABS
warning light illuminate simultaneously
during driving.
Even if the EBD system malfunctions, the
conventional braking system will still func-
tion. However, the rear wheels will be
more prone to locking when the brakes
are applied harder than usual and the
vehicle’s motion may therefore become
somewhat harder to control.
If the brake system warning light and ABS
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Starting and operating 7-27
warning light illuminate simultaneously, gerous. This indicates your brake Vehicle Dynamics Control
take the following steps. system may not be working system
1. Stop the vehicle in the nearest safe, properly. If the light remains on,
flat location. have the brakes inspected by a
2. Shut down the engine, apply the SUBARU dealer immediately. WARNING
parking brake, and then restart it. . If at all in doubt about whether
3. Release the parking brake. If both the brakes are operating prop- Always use the utmost care in
warning lights turn off, the EBD system erly, do not drive the vehicle. driving – overconfidence because
may be malfunctioning. Drive carefully to Have your vehicle towed to the you are driving with a Vehicle Dy-
the nearest SUBARU dealer and have the nearest SUBARU dealer for re- namics Control system equipped
system inspected. pair. vehicle could easily lead to a ser-
ious accident.
4. If both warning lights illuminate again
and stay illuminated after the engine has
been restarted, shut down the engine CAUTION
again, apply the parking brake, and check
the brake fluid level. Refer to “Brake fluid” . Even if your vehicle is equipped
F11-25. with Vehicle Dynamics Control
5. If the brake fluid level is not below the system, winter tires should be
“MIN” mark, the EBD system may be used when driving on snow-cov-
malfunctioning. Drive carefully to the ered or icy roads; in addition,
nearest SUBARU dealer and have the vehicle speed should be reduced
system inspected. considerably. Simply having a
6. If the brake fluid level is below the Vehicle Dynamics Control sys-
“MIN” mark, DO NOT drive the vehicle. tem does not guarantee that the
Instead, have the vehicle towed to the vehicle will be able to avoid
nearest SUBARU dealer for repair. accidents in any situation.
. Activation of the Vehicle Dy-
WARNING namics Control system is an
indication that the road being
. Driving with the brake system travelled on has a slippery sur-
warning light illuminated is dan- face; since having Vehicle Dy-
namics Control is no guarantee
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
– CONTINUED –
7-28 Starting and operating
that full vehicle control will be spare tire, the effectiveness of NOTE
maintained at all times and under the Vehicle Dynamics Control . Slight twitching of the brake pedal
all conditions, its activation system is reduced and this may be felt when the Vehicle Dynamics
should be seen as a sign that should be taken into account Control system operates; a small de-
the speed of the vehicle should when driving the vehicle in gree of vehicle or steering wheel shak-
be reduced considerably. such a condition. ing may also be noticed in this situa-
. Whenever suspension compo- tion. These are normal characteristics
nents, steering components, or In the event of wheelspin and/or skidding of Vehicle Dynamics Control operation
an axle are removed from a on a slippery road surface and/or during and are no cause for alarm.
vehicle equipped with Vehicle cornering and/or an evasive maneuver, . When driving off immediately after
Dynamics Control system, have the Vehicle Dynamics Control system starting the engine, a short-lived opera-
an inspection of that system adjusts the engine’s output and the tion noise may be noticed coming from
performed by an authorized wheels’ respective braking forces to help the engine compartment. This noise is
SUBARU dealer. maintain traction and directional control. generated as a result of a check being
. The following precautions should . Traction Control Function performed on the Vehicle Dynamics
The traction control function is designed to Control system and is normal.
be observed in order to ensure
prevent spinning of the driving wheels on . Depending on the timing of activa-
that the Vehicle Dynamics Con-
slippery road surfaces, thereby helping to tion of the brakes, the brake pedal may
trol system is operating properly:
maintain traction and directional control. seem to jolt when you drive off after
– All four wheels should be Activation of this function is shown by starting the engine. This is a conse-
fitted with tires of the same steady illumination of the Vehicle Dy- quence of the Vehicle Dynamics Con-
size, type, and brand. Further- namics Control operation indicator light. trol operational check and is normal.
more, the amount of wear . In the circumstances listed in the
should be the same for all . Skid Suppression Function following, the vehicle may be more
four tires. The skid suppression function is designed unstable than it feels to the driver.
– Keep the tire pressure at the to help maintain directional stability by The Vehicle Dynamics Control System
proper level as shown on the suppressing the wheels’ tendency to slide may therefore operate. Such operation
vehicle placard attached to sideways during steering operations. Acti- does not indicate a system fault.
the driver’s side door pillar. vation of this function is shown by flashing – on gravel-covered or rutted
– Use only the specified tem- of the Vehicle Dynamics Control operation roads
porary spare tire to replace a indicator light. – on unfinished roads
flat tire. With a temporary – when the vehicle is fitted with
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Starting and operating 7-29
snow tires or winter tires & Vehicle Dynamics Control when the ignition switch is turned to the
. Activation of the Vehicle Dynamics system monitor ON position.
Control system will cause operation of . The indicator light does not turn off
the steering wheel to feel slightly ! Vehicle Dynamics Control opera- approximately 2 seconds after the ignition
different compared to that for normal tion indicator light switch has been turned to the ON position.
conditions. ! Vehicle Dynamics Control warning
. Even if the vehicle is equipped with light/Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF
a Vehicle Dynamics Control system, it indicator light
is important that winter tires be used
when driving on snow-covered or icy
roads. (All four wheels should be fitted
with tires of the same size and brand.)
. It is always important to reduce
speed when approaching a corner,
even if the vehicle is equipped with
Vehicle Dynamics Control.
. All four wheels should be fitted with
tires of the same size, type, and brand;
furthermore, the amount of wear The indicator light illuminates when the
should be the same for all four tires. If ignition switch is turned to the ON position;
these precautions are not observed it turns off approximately 2 seconds later.
and non-matching tires are used, it is This indicator light flashes during activa-
quite possible that the Vehicle Dy- tion of the skid suppression function and is This single light has the function of
namics Control system will be unable illuminated steadily during activation of the indicating malfunctions in the Vehicle
to operate correctly as intended. traction control function. Dynamics Control system and the function
of indicating that the Vehicle Dynamics
. Always turn off the engine before The following two situations could indicate
Control system is not operating. It illumi-
replacing a tire as failure to do so may a malfunction of the Vehicle Dynamics
nates in the event of a malfunction in the
render the Vehicle Dynamics Control Control system; if either should occur,
system and is illuminated whenever the
system unable to operate correctly. have an authorized SUBARU dealer carry
system is not operating.
out an inspection of that system at the first
available opportunity.
. The indicator light does not illuminate
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
– CONTINUED –
7-30 Starting and operating
! Vehicle Dynamics Control warning ABS, whenever the ABS stops operating ! Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF in-
light due to a malfunction in that electrical dicator light
system, the Vehicle Dynamics Control will
The warning light illuminates when the This light illuminates to indicate that the
also become unable to control all four
ignition switch is turned to the “ON” Vehicle Dynamics Control system is in
brakes. Thus Vehicle Dynamics Control
position and turns off several seconds non-operation mode. This does not con-
system operation halts and the warning
after engine startup. This lighting pattern stitute failure of the Vehicle Dynamics
light turns on. Although both the Vehicle
indicates that the Vehicle Dynamics Con- Control system.
Dynamics Control system and the ABS
trol system is operating normally.
will be inoperable in this situation, it will NOTE
The following situations could indicate a still be possible to stop the vehicle using . The indicator light may remain on
malfunction of the Vehicle Dynamics normal braking. The Vehicle Dynamics for a while after the engine has been
Control system; if any should occur, have Control system and the ABS do not started, especially in cold weather. This
an authorized SUBARU dealer carry out adversely affect operation of the vehicle occurs because the engine has not yet
an inspection of the system at the first in any way when they are inoperable; warmed up and is completely normal.
available opportunity. however should such a situation occur, The light will turn off when the engine
. The warning light does not turn on drive with care and have an authorized has reached a suitable operating tem-
when the ignition switch is turned to the SUBARU dealer carry out an inspection of perature.
ON position. those systems at the first available oppor- . When an engine problem occurs
. The warning light turns on while the tunity. and the CHECK ENGINE warning light/
vehicle is being driven. NOTE malfunction indicator lamp turns on,
. When a malfunction has occurred in the indicator light will also illuminate.
When the warning light turns on and off
the Vehicle Dynamics Control electrical The following two situations could indicate
in the following way, it indicates that
system, only the warning light will turn on. malfunction of the Vehicle Dynamics
the Vehicle Dynamics Control system
In such an event, the ABS will still be Control system; if either should occur,
is operating normally.
operating normally. have an authorized SUBARU dealer carry
. Although turning on after the engine
. The warning light will also turn on when out an inspection of that system at the first
has been started, the warning light
a problem occurs with the ABS or Vehicle available opportunity.
quickly turns off and stays off.
Dynamics Control electronic control sys- . The indicator light does not turn on
. The warning light turns on when the
tems. when the ignition switch is turned to the
vehicle is being driven; it then turns off
Because the Vehicle Dynamics Control and stays off. ON position.
system controls each brake through the . The indicator light fails to turn off after
the engine is started, even when several
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Starting and operating 7-31
minutes have passed to allow the engine like a model not equipped with the Vehicle trol system, the vehicle’s running per-
to heat up sufficiently. Dynamics Control system. When the formance is comparable with that of a
switch is pressed again to reactivate the vehicle that does not have a Vehicle
& Vehicle Dynamics Control Vehicle Dynamics Control system, the “ ” Dynamics Control system. Do not de-
OFF switch indicator light turns off. activate the Vehicle Dynamics Control
With the Vehicle Dynamics Control system system except when absolutely neces-
deactivated, traction and stability en- sary.
hancement offered by Vehicle Dynamics
Control system is unavailable. Therefore
you should not deactivate the Vehicle
Dynamics Control system except under
above-mentioned situations.
NOTE
. When the switch has been pressed
to deactivate the Vehicle Dynamics
Control system, the Vehicle Dynamics
Control system automatically reacti-
vates itself the next time the ignition
Pressing the switch to deactivate the
switch is turned to the “LOCK” position
Vehicle Dynamics Control system can
and the engine is restarted.
facilitate the following operations:
. If the switch is held down for 10
. a standing start on a steeply sloping seconds or longer, the indicator light
road with a snowy, gravel-covered, or turns off, the Vehicle Dynamics Control
otherwise slippery surface system is activated, and the system
. extrication of the vehicle when its ignores any further pressing of the
wheels are stuck in mud or deep snow switch. To make the switch usable
again, turn the ignition switch to the
When the switch is pressed during engine
“LOCK” position and restart the en-
operation, the “ ” indicator light on the
gine.
combination meter illuminates. The Vehi-
. When the switch is pressed to
cle Dynamics Control system will be
deactivate the Vehicle Dynamics Con-
deactivated and the vehicle will behave
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
7-32 Starting and operating
Tire pressure monitoring WARNING low pressure threshold, the low tire
system (TPMS) (U.S.-spec. pressure warning light should turn
If the low tire pressure warning light off a few minutes later.
models) illuminates while driving, never If this light still illuminates while
brake suddenly and keep driving driving after adjusting the tire pres-
straight ahead while gradually redu- sure, a tire may have significant
cing speed. Then slowly pull off the damage and a fast leak that causes
road to a safe place. Otherwise an the tire to lose air rapidly. If you have
accident involving serious vehicle a flat tire, replace it with a spare tire
damage and serious personal injury as soon as possible.
could occur.
When a spare tire is mounted or a
Check the pressure for all four tires wheel rim is replaced without the
and adjust the pressure to the COLD original pressure sensor/transmitter
tire pressure shown on the tire being transferred, the low tire pres-
placard on the door pillar on the sure warning light will illuminate
driver’s side. steadily after blinking for approxi-
Even when the vehicle is driven a mately 1 minute. This indicates the
The tire pressure monitoring system pro- very short distance, the tires get TPMS is unable to monitor all four
vides the driver with a warning message warm and their pressures increase road wheels. Contact your SUBARU
by sending a signal from a sensor that is accordingly. Be sure to let the tires dealer as soon as possible for tire
installed in each wheel when tire pressure cool thoroughly before adjusting and sensor replacement and/or sys-
is severely low. their pressures to the standard tem resetting.
The tire pressure monitoring system will values shown on the tire placard. Do not inject any tire liquid or
activate only when the vehicle is driven at Refer to “Tires and wheels” F11-31. aerosol tire sealant into the tires,
speeds above 20 mph (32 km/h). Also, The tire pressure monitoring system as this may cause a malfunction of
this system may not react immediately to a does not function when the vehicle the tire pressure sensors. If the light
sudden drop in tire pressure (for example, is stationary. After adjusting the tire illuminates steadily after blinking for
a blow-out caused by running over a pressures, increase the vehicle approximately 1 minute, promptly
sharp object). speed to at least 20 mph (32 km/h) contact a SUBARU dealer to have
to start the TPMS re-checking of the the system inspected.
tire inflation pressures. If the tire
pressures are now above the severe
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Starting and operating 7-33
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
– CONTINUED –
7-34 Starting and operating
WARNING CAUTION
. Never leave unattended children If your vehicle has a front under-
or pets in the vehicle. They could spoiler and rear underspoiler (both
accidentally injure themselves or optional), pay attention to blocks
others through inadvertent op- and other obstructions on the
eration of the vehicle. Also, on ground when parking. The under-
hot or sunny days, the tempera- spoilers could be damaged by con-
ture in a closed vehicle could tact with them.
quickly become high enough to
cause severe or possibly fatal
injuries to people.
. Do not park the vehicle over
When parking on a hill, always turn the flammable materials such as dry
steering wheel. When the vehicle is grass, waste paper or rags, as
headed up the hill, the front wheels should they may burn easily if they come
be turned away from the curb. near hot engine or exhaust sys-
tem parts.
. Be sure to stop the engine if you
take a nap in the vehicle. If
engine exhaust gas enters the
passenger compartment, occu-
pants in the vehicle could die
from carbon monoxide (CO) con-
tained in the exhaust gas.
CAUTION
The Hill start assist system is a
device only for helping the driver
to START the vehicle on an uphill
grade. To prevent accidents when
the vehicle is parked on a slope, be
sure to firmly set the parking brake.
When setting the parking brake,
make sure that the vehicle remains On an uphill grade, when the clutch pedal The Hill start assist system does not
stationary when the clutch pedal is is depressed while the brake pedal is also operate when the vehicle is facing down-
released. depressed, braking power is maintained hill. And the Hill start assist system may
temporarily by the Hill start assist system not operate on slight grades.
The Hill start assist system is a device to when the brake pedal is released. The
make starting on an uphill grade easier. driver is therefore able to start the vehicle When starting in reverse and using the Hill
the same way as on a level grade, just start assist system, a braking effect may
using the clutch and accelerator pedal. be felt even after the brake pedal has
been released. However, this braking
effect should disappear once the clutch
pedal is released.
A slight jolt may be felt when the vehicle
begins to move forward after being re-
versed.
If the braking power of the Hill start assist
system is insufficient after the brake pedal
is released, apply more braking power by
pressing the brake pedal again.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
– CONTINUED –
7-36 Starting and operating
& Hill start assist warning light Cruise control & To set cruise control
Cruise control enables you to maintain a
constant vehicle speed without holding
your foot on the accelerator pedal and it is
operative when the vehicle speed is 25
mph (40 km/h) or more. Make sure the
main switch is turned “OFF” when the
cruise control is not in use to avoid
unintentionally setting the cruise control.
NOTE
If you press the main switch button
while turning the ignition switch “ON”,
When the ignition switch is turned to the the cruise control function is deacti-
vated and the “CRUISE” indicator light 1. Push the “CRUISE” main switch but-
“ON” position, the Hill start assist warning ton.
light illuminates and turns off after approxi- flashes. To reactivate the cruise control
mately 2 seconds. While the engine is function, turn the ignition switch back
rotating, if any malfunction is detected in to the “Acc” or “LOCK” position, and
the Hill start assist system control, the then turn it again to the “ON” position.
warning light will illuminate. If the warning
light illuminates, have the vehicle in- WARNING
spected by your SUBARU dealer.
Do not use the cruise control under
any of the following conditions. This
may cause loss of vehicle control:
. driving up or down a steep grade
. driving on slippery or winding
roads
. driving in heavy traffic The “ ” indicator light on the combi-
nation meter will illuminate.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Starting and operating 7-37
2. Depress the accelerator pedal until the combination meter will illuminate. only).
vehicle reaches the desired speed. The vehicle will maintain the desired . Shift the selector lever into the “N”
speed. position (AT models only).
. Shift the shift lever into neutral position
Vehicle speed can be temporarily in-
(MT models only).
creased while driving with the cruise
control activated. Simply depress the The “ ” indicator light on the combina-
accelerator pedal to accelerate the vehi- tion meter turns off when the cruise control
cle. When the accelerator pedal is re- is canceled.
leased, the vehicle will return to and
maintain the previous cruising speed.
& To temporarily cancel the
cruise control
The cruise control can be temporarily
canceled in the following ways:
3. Push the “SET/COAST” button and
release it. Then release the accelerator
pedal.
& To turn off the cruise control When the difference between the actual ! To decrease the speed (by button)
There are two ways to turn off the cruise vehicle speed and the set speed is less
control: than 4 mph (6.8 km/h), the set speed can
be increased 1 mph (1.6 km/h) each time
. Push the “CRUISE” main switch button by pressing the “RES/ACC” button quickly.
again.
. Turn the ignition switch to the “Acc” or ! To increase the speed (by accel-
“LOCK” position (but only when the erator pedal)
vehicle is completely stopped). 1. Depress the accelerator pedal to
accelerate the vehicle to the desired
& To change the cruising speed speed.
2. Push the “SET/COAST” button once.
! To increase the speed (by button) Now the desired speed is set and the
vehicle will keep running at that speed
without depressing the accelerator pedal.
Push the “SET/COAST” button and hold it
until the vehicle reaches the desired
NOTE speed. Then, release the button. The
If the difference between the actual vehicle speed at that moment will be
vehicle speed when the button is memorized and treated as the new set
pushed and the speed last time you speed.
set is less than 4 mph (6.8 km/h), the
vehicle speed will be lowered by 1 mph When the difference between the actual
(1.6 km/h). This occurs because the vehicle speed and the set speed is less
cruise control system unit regards this than 4 mph (6.8 km/h), the set speed can
operation as that intended to decrease be lowered 1 mph (1.6 km/h) each time by
the vehicle speed. pressing the “SET/COAST” button quickly.
Push the “RES/ACC” button and hold it
until the vehicle reaches the desired
speed. Then, release the button. The
vehicle speed at that moment will be
memorized and treated as the new set
speed.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Starting and operating 7-39
! To decrease the speed (by brake NOTE & Cruise control set indicator
pedal) . If you press the “CRUISE” main light
1. Depress the brake pedal to release switch button while turning the ignition
cruise control temporarily. switch “ON”, the cruise control func-
tion is deactivated and the cruise
2. When the speed decreases to the control indicator light flashes. To re-
desired speed, press the “SET/COAST” activate the cruise control function,
button once. Now the desired speed is set turn the ignition switch back to the
and the vehicle will keep running at that “Acc” or “LOCK” position, and then
speed without depressing the accelerator turn it again to the “ON” position.
pedal. . If this indicator light and the CHECK
ENGINE warning light/malfunction in-
& Cruise control indicator light dicator lamp flash simultaneously dur-
ing driving, have the vehicle checked
by your nearest SUBARU dealer.
The cruise control set indicator light
illuminates when the ignition switch is
turned to the “ON” position and turns off
after approximately 3 seconds.
The light illuminates when vehicle speed
has been set.
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Driving tips
New vehicle break-in driving – the first Loading your vehicle......................................... 8-11
1,000 miles (1,600 km) ..................................... 8-2 Vehicle capacity weight...................................... 8-12
Fuel economy hints ............................................ 8-2 GVWR and GAWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
Engine exhaust gas (carbon monoxide)............ 8-2 and Gross Axle Weight Rating) ........................ 8-13
Catalytic converter .............................................. 8-3 Roof rail (if equipped) ........................................ 8-13
Roof molding and crossbar (if equipped) ............ 8-14
Periodic inspections ........................................... 8-4
Trailer hitch (dealer option)............................... 8-15
Driving in foreign countries ............................... 8-4
Connecting a trailer ........................................... 8-16
Driving tips for AWD models.............................. 8-5 When you do not tow a trailer ............................ 8-17
On-pavement and off-road driving ..................... 8-6 Trailer towing ..................................................... 8-17
Winter driving ...................................................... 8-8 Warranties and maintenance .............................. 8-17
Operation during cold weather............................. 8-8 Maximum load limits .......................................... 8-18
Driving on snowy and icy roads .......................... 8-9 Trailer hitches.................................................... 8-21
Corrosion protection .......................................... 8-10 Connecting a trailer ........................................... 8-21
Snow tires ......................................................... 8-10 Trailer towing tips .............................................. 8-23
Tire chains ......................................................... 8-11 8
Rocking the vehicle............................................ 8-11
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
8-2 Driving tips
New vehicle break-in driving Fuel economy hints Engine exhaust gas (carbon
– the first 1,000 miles (1,600 monoxide)
The following suggestions will help to save
km) fuel.
The performance and long life of your . Select the proper gear position for the WARNING
vehicle are dependent on how you handle speed and road conditions.
. Avoid sudden acceleration or decelera- . Never inhale engine exhaust gas.
and care for your vehicle while it is new.
tion. Always accelerate gently until you Engine exhaust gas contains
Follow these instructions during the first
reach the desired speed. Then try to carbon monoxide, a colorless
1,000 miles (1,600 km):
maintain that speed for as long as and odorless gas which is dan-
. Do not race the engine. And do not gerous, or even lethal, if inhaled.
allow engine speed to exceed 4,000 rpm possible.
except in an emergency. . Do not pump the accelerator and avoid . Always properly maintain the en-
racing the engine. gine exhaust system to prevent
. Do not drive at one constant engine or
. Avoid unnecessary engine idling. engine exhaust gas from enter-
vehicle speed for a long time, either fast or
ing the vehicle.
slow. . Keep the engine properly tuned.
. Avoid starting suddenly and rapid . Keep the tires inflated to the correct . Never run the engine in a closed
acceleration, except in an emergency. pressure shown on the tire placard, which space, such as a garage, except
for the brief time needed to drive
. Avoid hard braking, except in an is located under the door latch on the
driver’s side. Low pressure will increase the vehicle in or out of it.
emergency.
tire wear and fuel consumption. . Avoid remaining in a parked
The same break-in procedures should be . Use the air conditioner only when vehicle for a lengthy time while
applied to an overhauled engine, newly necessary. the engine is running. If that is
mounted engine or when brake pads or . Keep the front and rear wheels in unavoidable, then use the venti-
brake linings are replaced with new ones. proper alignment. lation fan to force fresh air into
the vehicle.
. Avoid carrying unnecessary luggage or
cargo. . Always keep the front ventilator
inlet grille free from snow, leaves
or other obstructions to ensure
that the ventilation system al-
ways works properly.
. If at any time you suspect that
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Driving tips 8-3
exhaust fumes are entering the Catalytic converter reduce HC, CO and NOx in exhaust
vehicle, have t he probl em gases, thus providing cleaner exhaust.
checked and corrected as soon
To avoid damage to the catalytic conver-
as possible. If you must drive
ter:
under these conditions, drive
only with all windows fully open. . Use only unleaded fuel. Even a small
amount of leaded fuel will damage the
. Keep the rear gate closed while catalytic converter.
driving to prevent exhaust gas
. Never start the engine by pushing or
from entering the vehicle.
pulling the vehicle.
. Avoid racing the engine.
NOTE . Never turn off the ignition switch while
Due to the expansion and contraction the vehicle is moving.
of the metals used in the manufacture . Keep your engine tuned-up. If you feel
of the exhaust system, you may hear a the engine running rough (misfiring, back-
crackling sound coming from the ex- Turbo models firing or incomplete combustion), have
haust system for a short time after the your vehicle checked and repaired by an
engine has been shut off. This sound is authorized SUBARU dealer.
normal. . Do not apply undercoating or rust
prevention treatment to the heat shield of
catalytic converter and the exhaust sys-
tem.
. Do not drive with an extremely low fuel
level.
WARNING
. Avoid fire hazards. Do not drive
or park the vehicle anywhere
Non-turbo models near flammable materials (e.g.,
grass, paper, rags or leaves),
The catalytic converter is installed in the because the catalytic converter
exhaust system. It serves as a catalyst to
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
– CONTINUED –
8-4 Driving tips
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Driving tips 8-5
Driving tips for AWD models . An AWD model is better able to climb . There are some precautions that you
steeper roads under snowy or slippery must observe when towing your vehicle.
conditions than a two wheel drive vehicle. For detail information, refer to “Towing”
There is little difference in handling, F9-12.
however, during extremely sharp turns or
sudden braking. Therefore, when driving WARNING
down a slope or turning corners, be sure
to reduce your speed and maintain an . Always maintain a safe driving
ample distance from other vehicles. speed according to the road and
weather conditions in order to
. When replacing a tire, make sure you
avoid having an accident on a
use only the same size, construction,
sharp turn, during sudden brak-
brand, and load range as the original tires
ing or under other similar condi-
listed on the tire placard. Using other
tions.
sizes, circumference or construction may
result in severe mechanical damage to the . Always use the utmost care in
All-Wheel Drive distributes the engine drive train of your vehicle and may affect driving – overconfidence be-
power to all four wheels. AWD models ride, handling, braking, speedometer/od- cause you are driving an All-
provide better traction when driving on ometer calibration, and clearance be- Wheel Drive model could easily
slippery, wet or snow-covered roads and tween the body and tires. It also may be lead to a serious accident.
when moving out of mud, dirt and sand. dangerous and lead to loss of vehicle
By shifting power between the front and control.
rear wheels, SUBARU AWD can also . If you use a temporary spare tire to
provide added traction during acceleration replace a flat tire, be sure to use the
and added engine braking force during original temporary spare tire stored in the
deceleration. vehicle. Using other sizes may result in
severe mechanical damage to the drive
Therefore, your SUBARU AWD model train of your vehicle.
may handle differently than an ordinary
two wheel drive vehicle and it contains . Always check the cold tire pressure
some features unique to AWD. For safety before starting to drive. The recom-
purposes as well as to avoid damaging mended tire pressure is provided on the
the AWD system, you should keep the tire placard, which is located under the
following tips in mind: door latch on the driver’s side.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
8-6 Driving tips
On-pavement and off-road with its higher profile and center SUBARU off-road, certain common sense
of gravity, is more likely to be precautions such as those in the following
driving list should be taken.
affected by crosswinds than or-
dinary passenger cars. . Make certain that you and all of your
WARNING . Always use the utmost care in passengers are wearing seatbelts.
driving – overconfidence be- . Carry some emergency equipment,
. In a rollover crash, an unbelted cause you are driving an All- such as a towing rope or chain, a shovel,
person is significantly more Wheel Drive model could easily wheel blocks, first aid kit and cell phone or
likely to die than a person wear- lead to a serious accident. citizens band radio.
ing a seat belt. You the driver and . Drive carefully. Do not take unneces-
all your passengers should fas- Your vehicle is classified as a utility sary risks by driving in dangerous areas or
ten the seatbelts before starting vehicle. Utility vehicles feature a higher over rough terrain.
to drive in order to minimize the ground clearance which enables them to . Slow down and employ extra caution at
chance of serious injury or death. be used for wide applications including off- all times. When driving off-road, you will
. Do not make sharp turns and road driving. But please keep in mind that not have the benefit of marked traffic
quick maneuvers unless abso- your vehicle is neither a conventional off- lanes, banked curves, traffic signs and
lutely unavoidable. Such actions road vehicle nor an all-terrain vehicle. A the like.
are dangerous as you may lose higher center of gravity in relation to the . Do not drive across steep slopes.
control, possibly resulting in a tread width as compared with ordinary Instead, drive either straight up or straight
rollover which could cause death passenger cars makes vehicles of this down the slopes. A vehicle can much
or serious injury. type more likely to roll over. In reality, utility more easily tip over sideways than it can
. Always maintain a safe driving vehicles have a significantly higher roll- end over end. Avoid driving straight up or
speed according to the road and over rate than other types of vehicles. The down slopes that are too steep.
high ground clearance of this vehicle is a
weather conditions in order to . Avoid sharp turning maneuvers, espe-
avoid having an accident on a real advantage, giving you a better view of
cially at higher speeds.
sharp turn, during sudden brak- the road and allowing you to anticipate
problems earlier. However, remember that . Do not grip the inside or spokes of the
ing or under other similar condi- steering wheel. A bad bump could jerk the
tions. your utility vehicle is not designed for high-
speed cornering comparable to ordinary wheel and injure your hands. Instead drive
. Whenever strong crosswinds are passenger cars and that your vehicle with your fingers and thumbs on the
present, slow down sufficiently could roll over if you make a sharp turn outside of the rim.
to maintain control of your vehi- at high speed. If you do take your . If driving through water, such as when
cle. Remember that your vehicle,
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Driving tips 8-7
crossing shallow streams, first check the underbody. Clear off any such matter from under hard-driving conditions such as
depth of the water and the bottom of the the underbody. If the vehicle is used with rough roads or off roads will necessitate
stream bed for firmness and ensure that these materials trapped or adhering to the more frequent replacement of engine oil,
the bed of the stream is flat. Drive slowly underbody, a mechanical breakdown or brake fluid and transmission oil than that
and completely through the stream. The fire could occur. specified in the maintenance schedule
water should be shallow enough that it . Secure all cargo carried inside the described in the “Warranty and Mainte-
does not reach the vehicle’s undercar- vehicle and make certain that it is not nance Booklet”.
riage. Water entering the engine air intake piled higher than the seatbacks. During
or the exhaust pipe or water splashing sudden stops or jolts, unsecured cargo Remember that damage done to your
onto electrical parts may damage your could be thrown around in the vehicle and SUBARU while operating it off-road and
vehicle and may cause it to stall. Never cause injury. Do not pile heavy loads on not using common sense precautions
attempt to drive through rushing water; the roof. Those loads raise the vehicle’s such as those listed above is not eligible
regardless of its depth, it can wash away center of gravity and make it more prone for warranty coverage.
the ground from under your tires, resulting to tip over.
in possible loss of traction and even . If you must rock the vehicle to free it
vehicle rollover. from sand or mud, depress the accelerator
. Always check your brakes for effec- pedal slightly and move the selector lever
tiveness immediately after driving in sand, back and forth between “D” and “R”
mud or water. Do this by driving slowly repeatedly. Do not race the engine. For
and stepping on the brake pedal. Repeat the best possible traction, avoid spinning
that process several times to dry out the the wheels when trying to free the vehicle.
brake discs and brake pads. . When the road surface is extremely
. Do not drive or park over or near slippery, you can obtain better traction by
flammable materials such as dry grass or starting the vehicle with the transmission
fallen leaves, as they may burn easily. The in 2nd than 1st.
exhaust system is very hot while the . Never equip your vehicle with tires
engine is running and right after engine larger than those specified in this manual.
stops. This could create a fire hazard. . Wash the vehicle’s underbody after off-
. After driving through tall grass, mud, road driving. Suspension components are
rocks, sand, rivers, etc., check that there particularly prone to dirt buildup, so they
is no grass, bush, paper, rags, stones, need to be washed thoroughly.
sand, etc. adhering to or trapped on the . Frequent driving of an AWD model
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
8-8 Driving tips
Winter driving Forcing a frozen door open may damage washer nozzles by operating the washer
or separate the rubber weather strips for a certain period of time. Otherwise, if
around the door. If the door is frozen, the concentration of the fluid remaining in
use hot water to melt the ice, and after- the piping is too low for the outside
wards thoroughly wipe the water away. temperature, it may freeze and block the
nozzles.
Use a windshield washer fluid that con-
tains an antifreeze solution. Do not use CAUTION
engine antifreeze or other substitutes
because they may damage the paint of Adjust the washer fluid concentra-
the vehicle. tion appropriately for the outside
SUBARU Windshield Washer Fluid con- temperature. If the concentration is
tains 58.5% methyl alcohol and 41.5% inappropriate, sprayed washer fluid
surfactant, by volume. Its freezing tem- may freeze on the windshield and
perature varies according to how much it obstruct your view, and the fluid
is diluted, as indicated in the following may freeze in the reservoir tank.
& Operation during cold table.
weather
! Before driving your vehicle
Carry some emergency equipment, such Washer Fluid Con- Freezing Temperature
as a window scraper, a bag of sand, centration Before entering the vehicle, remove any
flares, a small shovel and jumper cables. snow or ice from your shoes because that
30% 10.48F (−128C)
could make the pedals slippery and
Check the battery and cables. Cold 50% −48F (−208C) dangerous.
temperatures reduce battery capacity. 100% −498F (−458C)
The battery must be in good condition to While warming up the vehicle before
provide enough power for cold winter driving, check that the accelerator pedal,
In order to prevent freezing of washer brake pedal, and all other controls operate
starts. fluid, check the freezing temperatures in smoothly.
Use an engine oil of proper grade and the table above when adjusting the fluid
viscosity for cold weather. Heavy summer concentration to the outside temperature. Clear away ice and snow that has
oil will cause harder starting. If you fill the reservoir tank with a fluid with accumulated under the fenders to avoid
a different concentration from the one making steering difficult. During severe
Keep the door locks from freezing by winter driving, stop when and where it is
squirting them with deicer or glycerin. used previously, purge the old fluid from
the piping between the reservoir tank and safe to do so and check under the fenders
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Driving tips 8-9
CAUTION Snow stuck on the wiper arm prevents the & Snow tires
wiper from working effectively. If snow is
Avoid prolonged continuous driving stuck on the wiper arm, pull off the road to WARNING
in snowstorms. Snow will enter the a safe place, then remove it. If you stop
engine’s intake system and may the vehicle at road side, use the hazard . When replacing original tires with
hinder the air flow, which could warning flasher to alert other drivers. winter (snow) tires, make sure
result in engine shutdown or even you use only the same size,
We recommend use of non-freezing type
breakdown. construction and load range as
wiper blades (winter blades) during the
the original tires listed on the tire
seasons you could have snow and freez-
! Wiper operation when snowing placard. Using other sizes and
ing temperatures. Blades of this type give
construction may affect speed-
Before driving in cold weather, make sure superior wiping performance in snowy
ometer/odometer calibration and
the wiper blades are not frozen to the conditions. Be sure to use blades that
clearance between the body and
windshield or rear window. If the wiper are suitable for your vehicle.
tires. It also may be dangerous
blades are frozen to the windshield or rear and lead to loss of vehicle con-
window, use the defroster with the airflow CAUTION
trol.
control dial in the “ ” position and the
temperature control dial set for maximum
During high-speed driving, non- . You must install four winter tires
freezing type wiper blades may not that are of the same size, con-
warmth until the wiper blades are com-
perform as well as standard wiper struction, brand, and load range.
pletely thawed out. If your vehicle is
blades. If this happens, reduce the Mixing other sizes or construc-
equipped with a wiper deicer, it is helpful
vehicle speed. tions may result in severe me-
to thaw the windshield wiper blades. To
thaw out the rear wiper blade, use the rear chanical damage to the drive
window defogger. train of your vehicle and may
NOTE affect ride, handling, braking and
When driving in snow, if frozen snow starts When the season requiring non-freez- speedometer/odometer calibra-
to stick on the surface of the windshield ing type wiper blades is over, replace tion. It also may be dangerous
despite wiper operation, use the defroster them with standard wiper blades. and lead to loss of vehicle con-
with the airflow control dial in “ ” and the trol.
temperature control dial set for maximum & Corrosion protection . Do not use a combination of
warmth. After the windshield gets warmed radial, belted bias or bias tires
enough to melt the frozen snow on it, Refer to “Corrosion protection” F10-4.
since it may cause dangerous
wash it away using the windshield washer. handling characteristics and lead
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Driving tips 8-11
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
– CONTINUED –
8-12 Driving tips
WARNING CAUTION
. When you carry something inside Do not carry spray cans, containers
the vehicle, secure it whenever with flammable or corrosive liquids
you can to prevent it from being or any other dangerous items inside
thrown around inside the vehicle the vehicle.
during sudden stops, sharp turns
or in an accident.
NOTE
. Do not pile heavy loads on the For better fuel economy, do not carry
roof. These loads raise the vehi- unneeded cargo.
cle’s center of gravity and make it
more prone to tip over.
& Vehicle capacity weight
. Secure lengthy items properly to The load capacity of your vehicle is
prevent them from shooting for- determined by weight, not by available
ward and causing serious injury cargo space. The maximum load you can
during a sudden stop. carry in your vehicle is shown on the
. Never exceed the maximum load vehicle placard attached to the driver’s
limit. If you do, some parts on side door pillar. It includes the total weight
your vehicle can break, or it can of the driver and all passengers and their
change the way your vehicle belongings, any optional equipment such
handles. This could result in loss as a trailer hitch, roof rack or bike carrier,
of control and cause personal etc.
injury. Also, overloading can
shorten the life of your vehicle.
. Do not place anything on the
extended cargo area cover. Such
items could tumble forward in the
event of a sudden stop or a
collision. This could cause ser-
ious injury.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Driving tips 8-13
& GVWR and GAWR (Gross In addition, the total weight applied to & Roof rail (if equipped)
Vehicle Weight Rating and each axle (GAW) must never exceed the
Gross Axle Weight Rating) GAWR. The front and rear GAWs can be
adjusted by relocating luggage inside the
vehicle.
Even if the total weight of your luggage is
lower than the vehicle capacity weight,
either front or rear GAW may exceed the
GAWR, depending on the distribution of
the luggage.
When possible, the load should be evenly
distributed throughout the vehicle.
If you carry heavy loads in the vehicle, you
should confirm that GVW and front and
rear GAWs are within the GVWR and 1) Roof rack
GAWR by putting your vehicle on a Luggage can be carried on the roof after
The certification label attached to the vehicle scale, found at a commercial securing the roof rack to the roof rail.
driver’s side doorjamb shows GVWR weighing station. When installing the roof rack on the roof
(Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) and GAWR Do not use replacement tires with a lower rail, follow the manufacturer’s instructions.
(Gross Axle Weight Rating). load range than the originals because they The roof rail is designed to carry loads
The GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) must may lower the GVWR and GAWR limita- (luggage and roof rack) of not more than
never exceed the GVWR. GVW is the tions. Replacement tires with a higher load 150 lbs (68 kg).
combined total of weight of the vehicle, range than the originals do not increase
fuel, driver, all passengers, luggage and the GVWR and GAWR limitations. CAUTION
any optional equipment. Therefore, the
. When using the roof rack, make
GVW changes depending on the situation.
sure that the total carrying load
The GVWR equals Curb Weight (actual
of the roof rack and luggage does
weight of your vehicle – including standard
not exceed 150 lbs (68 kg). Over-
equipment, fluids, emergency tools and
loading may cause damage to
spare tire assembly) plus the vehicle
the vehicle.
capacity weight.
. For cargo carrying purposes, the
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
– CONTINUED –
8-14 Driving tips
roof rail must be used together & Roof molding and crossbar the vehicle and create a safety
with the roof rack and any appro- (if equipped) hazard.
priate carrying attachment that
may be needed. The roof rail Cargo can be carried after securing the
must never be used alone to roof crossbar kit to the roof molding and
carry cargo. Otherwise, damage installing the appropriate carrying attach-
to the roof or paint or a danger- ment. When installing the roof crossbar
ous road hazard due to loss of kit, follow the manufacturer’s instructions.
cargo could result.
When you carry cargo on the roof using
the roof crossbar kit and a carrying
NOTE attachment, never exceed the maximum
Remember that the vehicle’s center of load limit as explained below. You should
gravity is altered with the weight of the also be careful that your vehicle does not
load on the roof, thus affecting driving exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
characteristics. (GVWR) and front and rear Gross Axle
Weight Rating (GAWR). For information
Drive carefully. Avoid rapid starts, hard
CAUTION about loading cargo into or onto your
cornering and abrupt stops. Crosswind
vehicle, refer to “Loading your vehicle”
effects will be increased. . For cargo carrying purposes, the F8-11. The maximum load limit of the
roof molding must be used to- cargo, crossbars and carrying attachment
gether with a roof crossbar kit must not exceed 176 lbs (80 kg). Place
and the appropriate carrying at- the heaviest load at the bottom, nearest
tachment. Otherwise, damage to the roof, and evenly distribute the cargo.
the roof or paint or a dangerous Always properly secure all cargo.
road hazard due to loss of cargo
could result.
. When using the roof crossbar kit,
make sure that the total weight of
the crossbars, carrying attach-
ment and cargo does not exceed
the maximum load limit. Over-
loading may cause damage to
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Driving tips 8-15
! Installing carrying attachments on ! Removal and installation of the Trailer hitch (dealer option)
the crossbars crossbars
When installing any carrying attachment
such as a bike carrier, ski carrier, kayak WARNING
carrier, cargo basket, etc. on the cross-
. Never exceed the maximum
bars, follow the manufacturer’s instruc-
weight specified for the trailer
tions and make sure that the attachment is
hitch. Exceeding the maximum
securely fixed to the crossbars. Use only
weight could cause an accident
attachments designed specifically for the
resulting in serious personal in-
crossbars. A set of the crossbars is
juries. Permissible trailer weight
designed to carry loads (cargo and attach-
changes depending on the situa-
ment) of not more than 165 lbs (75 kg).
tion. For possible recommenda-
Before operating the vehicle, make sure
tions and limitations, refer to
that the cargo is properly secured on the
“Trailer towing” F8-17.
attachment.
. Trailer brakes are required when
Each of the two roof moldings has two
NOTE mounting points for crossbars. Each
the towing load exceeds 1,000
Remember that the vehicle’s center of lbs (453 kg). Be sure your trailer
mounting point is fitted with a cover. Use
gravity is altered with the weight of the has safety chains and that each
a screwdriver to remove the covers. When
load on the roof, thus affecting the chain will hold the trailer’s max-
installing the crossbars on the roof mold-
driving characteristics. imum gross weight. Towing trai-
ing, follow the manufacturer’s instructions.
Drive carefully. Avoid rapid starts, hard lers without safety chains could
cornering and abrupt stops. Crosswind create a traffic safety hazard if
effects will be increased. the trailer separates from the
hitch due to coupling damage or
hitch ball damage.
. Be sure to check the hitch pin
and safety pin for positive lock-
ing placement before towing a
trailer. If the ball mount comes off
the hitch receiver, the trailer
could get loose and create a
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
– CONTINUED –
8-16 Driving tips
traffic safety hazard. does not come off the hitch receiver.
. Use only the ball mount supplied
with this hitch. Use the hitch only
as a weight carrying hitch. Do not
use with any type of weight
distributing hitch.
. The standard bumper beam must
be installed after you remove the
trailer hitch. Consult a SUBARU
dealer for purchase of a standard
bumper beam if you do not have
the original.
. Safety performance is decreased 2. Insert the hitch pin into the hole on the
and there is increased risk of hitch receiver tube so that the pin passes 1) Hitch ball installation point
injury to passengers in the case through the ball mount. 2) Hooks for safety chains
of an accident if the trailer hitch
or a standard bumper beam is 5. Use only a hitch ball that is appropriate
not installed. One of them must for the ball mount and your trailer. The
always be installed on the vehi- hitch ball must be securely installed on the
cle. ball mount.
. If a trailer hitch is installed, it is 6. Connect your trailer to the hitch ball.
not possible to install the rear 7. Connect the trailer and the hitch with
towing hook. safety chains that will hold the trailer’s
maximum gross weight. The chains
When you tow a trailer, refer to “Trailer should cross under the trailer tongue to
towing” F8-17. prevent the tongue from dropping onto the
ground in case it should disconnect from
& Connecting a trailer the hitch ball. Allow sufficient slack in the
chains taking tight-turn situations into
1. Remove the receiver cover from the 3. Insert the safety pin securely into the account; however, be careful not to let
hitch receiver tube. Then insert the ball hitch pin. them drag on the ground.
mount into the hitch receiver tube. 4. Pull the ball mount to make sure it
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Driving tips 8-17
! Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW) and ! Gross Axle Weight (GAW) and
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
(GVWR)
Certification label
GVWR is shown on the certification label
located on the driver’s side door jamb. Gross Axle Weight
Gross Vehicle Weight
The total weight applied to each axle
The Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW) must (GAW) must never exceed the Gross Axle
never exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight Weight Rating (GAWR). The front and rear
Rating (GVWR). GAWs can be adjusted by relocating
Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW) is the passengers and luggage inside the vehi-
combined total of the weight of the vehicle, cle. The front and rear GAWR are also
driver, passengers, luggage, trailer hitch, shown on the certification label.
trailer tongue load and any other optional To check both GVWR and GAWR and to
equipment installed on your vehicle. confirm that the total weight and weight
Therefore, the GVW changes depending distribution are within safe driving limits,
on the situation. Determine the GVW each you should have your vehicle and trailer
time before going on a trip by putting your weighed at a commercial weighing station.
vehicle and trailer on a vehicle scale. Be sure that all cargo is firmly secured to
prevent a change in weight distribution
while driving.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
– CONTINUED –
8-20 Driving tips
! Tongue load
WARNING
If the trailer is loaded with more
weight in the back of trailer’s axle
than in the front, the load is taken off
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Driving tips 8-21
the rear axle of the towing vehicle. hitch or other trailer towing & Connecting a trailer
This may cause the rear wheels to equipment.
skid, especially during braking or ! Trailer brakes
. Do not use axle-mounted hitches
when vehicle speed is reduced dur- as they can cause damage to the
ing cornering, resulting in over- axle housing, wheel bearings,
WARNING
steer, spin out and/or jackknifing. wheels or tires. . Adequate size trailer brakes are
required when the trailer and its
Choose a proper hitch for your vehicle and cargo exceed 1,000 lbs (453 kg)
& Trailer hitches trailer. total weight.
The use of a genuine SUBARU trailer
WARNING . Do not directly connect your
hitch is recommended. A genuine
trailer’s hydraulic brake system
SUBARU hitch is available from your
Never drill the frame or under-body to the hydraulic brake system in
SUBARU dealer.
of your vehicle to install a commer- your vehicle. Direct connection
cial trailer hitch. If you do, danger- If use of a non-genuine hitch is unavoid- would cause the vehicle’s brake
ous exhaust gas, water or mud may able, be sure the hitch is suited to your performance to deteriorate and
enter the passenger compartment vehicle and trailer. Consult with a profes- could lead to an accident.
through the drilled hole. Exhaust sional hitch supplier to assist you in
gas contains carbon monoxide, a choosing an appropriate hitch for your If your trailer’s total weight (trailer weight
colorless and odorless gas which is vehicle. Be sure to follow all of the hitch plus its cargo weight) exceeds 1,000 lbs
dangerous, or even lethal, if inhaled. manufacturer’s instructions for installation (453 kg), the trailer is required to be
Also, drilling the frame or under- and use. equipped with its own brake system.
body of your vehicle could cause Never use a hitch that mounts only to the Electric brakes or surge brakes are
deterioration of strength of your rear bumper. The bumper is not designed recommended, and must be installed
vehicle and cause corrosion around to handle that type of load. properly. Check that your trailer’s brakes
the drilled hole. For all types of hitches, regularly check conform with Federal, state/province and/
that the hitch mounting bolts and nuts are or other applicable regulations. Your
tight. SUBARU’s brake system is not designed
CAUTION to be tapped into the trailer’s hydraulic
brake system. Please ask your SUBARU
. Do not modify the vehicle ex- dealer and professional trailer supplier for
haust system, brake system, or more information about the trailer’s brake
other systems when installing a system.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
– CONTINUED –
8-22 Driving tips
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Driving tips 8-23
Trailer tire condition, size, load rating and ! Before starting out on a trip nificant blind spot.
proper inflation pressure should be in . Check that the vehicle and vehicle-to- . Sufficient time should be taken to learn
accordance with the trailer manufacturer’s hitch mounting are in good condition. If the “feel” of the vehicle/trailer combination
specifications. any problems are apparent, do not tow the before starting out on a trip. In an area free
trailer. of traffic, practice turning, stopping and
In the event your vehicle gets a flat tire
backing up.
when towing a trailer, ask a commercial . Check that the vehicle sits horizontally
road service to repair the flat tire. with the trailer attached. If the vehicle is ! Driving with a trailer
tipped sharply up at the front and down at . You should allow for considerably more
If you carry a regular size spare tire in your the rear, check the total trailer weight, stopping distance when towing a trailer.
vehicle or trailer as a precaution against GVW, GAWs and tongue load again, then Avoid sudden braking because it may
getting a flat tire, be sure that the spare confirm that the load and its distribution result in skidding or jackknifing and loss of
tire is firmly secured. are acceptable. control.
. Check that the tire pressures are . Avoid abrupt starts and sudden accel-
& Trailer towing tips correct. erations. If your vehicle has a manual
. Check that the vehicle and trailer are transmission, always start out in first gear
WARNING connected properly. Confirm that and release the clutch at moderate engine
. Never exceed 45 mph (72 km/h) – the trailer tongue is connected revolution.
when towing a trailer in hilly properly to the hitch ball. . Avoid uneven steering, sharp turns and
country on hot days. – the trailer lights connector is con- rapid lane changes.
. When towing a trailer, steering,
nected properly and trailer’s brake . Slow down before turning. Make a
lights illuminate when the vehicle’s longer than normal turning radius because
stability, stopping distance and
brake pedal is pressed, and that the the trailer wheels will be closer than the
braking performance will be dif-
trailer’s turn signal lights flash when vehicle wheels to the inside of the turn. In
ferent from normal operation. For
the vehicle’s turn signal lever is oper- a tight turn, the trailer could hit your
safety’s sake, you should employ
ated. vehicle.
extra caution when towing a
trailer and you should never – the safety chains are connected . Crosswinds will adversely affect the
speed. You should also keep the properly. handling of your vehicle and trailer, caus-
following tips in mind: – all cargo in the trailer is secured ing sway. Crosswinds can be due to
safety in position. weather conditions or the passing of large
– the side mirrors provide a good trucks or buses. If swaying occurs, firmly
rearward field of view without a sig- grip the steering wheel and slow down
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
– CONTINUED –
8-24 Driving tips
immediately but gradually. ! Driving on grades mission, avoid using the accelerator pedal
. When passing other vehicles, consid- . Before going down a steep hill, slow to stay stationary on an uphill slope
erable distance is required because of the down and shift into lower gear (if neces- instead of using the parking brake or foot
added weight and length caused by sary, use 1st gear) in order to utilize the brake. That may cause the transmission
attaching the trailer to your vehicle. engine braking effect and prevent over- fluid to overheat.
heating of your vehicle’s brakes. Do not . If your vehicle has an automatic trans-
make sudden downshifts. mission, place the selector lever as
. When driving uphill in hot weather, the follows.
air conditioner may turn off automatically Uphill slopes: “D” position
to protect the engine from overheating. Downhill slopes: A low-speed gear posi-
. When driving uphill in hot weather, pay tion to use engine braking
attention to the coolant temperature high
warning light (for all models) and AT OIL ! Parking on a grade
TEMP warning light (for AT models) Always block the wheels under both
because the engine and transmission are vehicle and trailer when parking. Apply
relatively prone to overheating under the parking brake firmly. You should not
these conditions. If the coolant tempera- park on a hill or slope. But if parking on a
ture high warning light or the AT OIL TEMP hill or slope cannot be avoided, you
1) Left turn warning light illuminates, immediately turn should take the following steps.
2) Right turn off the air conditioner and stop the vehicle 1. Apply the brakes and hold the pedal
in the nearest safe location. For further down.
. Backing up with a trailer is difficult and
instructions and additional information, 2. Have someone place wheel blocks
takes practice. When backing up with a
refer to the following sections. under both the vehicle and trailer wheels.
trailer, never accelerate or steer rapidly.
When turning back, grip the bottom of the – “If you park your vehicle in case of 3. When the wheel blocks are in place,
steering wheel with one hand and turn it to an emergency” F9-2 release the regular brakes slowly until the
the left for a left turn, and turn it to the right – “Engine overheating” F9-12 blocks absorb the load.
for a right turn. – “Coolant temperature low indicator 4. Apply the regular brakes and then
. If the ABS warning light illuminates light/Coolant temperature high warn- apply the parking brake; slowly release
while the vehicle is in motion, stop towing ing light” F3-13 the regular brakes.
the trailer and have repairs performed – “AT OIL TEMP warning light (AT 5. Shift into 1st or reverse gear (manual
immediately by the nearest SUBARU models)” F3-14 transmission) or “P” (automatic transmis-
dealer. . If your vehicle has an automatic trans- sion) and shut off the engine.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
In case of emergency
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
9-2 In case of emergency
WARNING
When a spare tire is mounted or a
wheel rim is replaced without the
original pressure sensor/transmitter
being transferred, the low tire pres-
sure warning light will illuminate
steadily after blinking for approxi-
mately one minute. This indicates
the tire pressure monitoring system
(TPMS) is unable to monitor all four
road wheels. Contact your SUBARU
The hazard warning flasher should be dealer as soon as possible for tire
used in day or night to warn other drivers and sensor replacement and/or sys-
when you have to park your vehicle under tem resetting.
emergency conditions.
Avoid stopping on the road. It is best to CAUTION
safely pull off the road if a problem occurs.
Never use any temporary spare tire
The hazard warning flasher can be acti-
other than the original. Using other
vated regardless of the ignition switch
sizes may result in severe mechan-
position.
ical damage to the drive train of your
Turn on the hazard warning by pushing vehicle.
the hazard warning flasher switch. Turn it
off by pushing the switch again. The temporary spare tire is smaller and
lighter than a conventional tire and is
designed for emergency use only. Re-
move the temporary spare tire and re-
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
In case of emergency 9-3
install the conventional tire as soon as & Precautions for AWD models
possible because the spare tire is de- with automatic transmission
signed only for temporary use.
Your vehicle is equipped with the AWD
Check the inflation pressure of the tem- (All-Wheel Drive) system. In addition, if
porary spare tire periodically to keep the your vehicle is an AT model, before driving
tire ready for use. The correct pressure is your vehicle with the temporary spare tire,
60 psi (420 kPa, 4.2 kg/cm2). deactivate the AWD capability of the
vehicle as follows.
When using the temporary spare tire, note
1. Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK”
the following.
position.
. Do not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h).
. Do not put a tire chain on the temporary
spare tire. Because of the smaller tire size,
1) Tread wear indicator bar
a tire chain will not fit properly.
2) Indicator location mark
. Do not use two or more temporary
spare tires at the same time. . When the wear indicator appears on
. Do not drive over obstacles. This tire the tread, replace the tire.
has a smaller diameter, so road clearance . The temporary spare tire must be used
is reduced. only on a rear wheel. If a front wheel tire
gets punctured, replace the wheel with a
rear wheel and install the temporary spare
tire in place of the removed rear wheel.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
– CONTINUED –
9-4 In case of emergency
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
In case of emergency 9-5
& Under the cargo area floor. The jack and towing hook are stored
in the tool bucket that is located in the
recess of the spare tire wheel.
Also, the tools in the tool bag can be
stored in the tool bucket as illustrated.
For how to use the jack, refer to “Flat tires”
F9-6.
Flat tires . Always turn off the engine before 5. Take out the jack, jack handle and
raising the flat tire off the ground wheel nut wrench.
If you have a flat tire while driving, never using the jack. Never swing or The tools and the spare tire are stored
brake suddenly; keep driving straight push the vehicle supported with under the floor of the cargo area. Refer to
ahead while gradually reducing speed. the jack. The jack can come out “Maintenance tools” F9-4.
Then slowly pull off the road to a safe of the jacking point due to a jolt
place. and this can result in a severe NOTE
accident. Make sure that the jack is well lubri-
& Changing a flat tire cated before using it.
1. Park on a hard, level surface, when-
WARNING ever possible, then stop the engine.
2. Set the parking brake securely and
. Do not jack up the vehicle on an shift the shift lever in reverse (MT models)
incline or a loose road surface. or the selector lever in the “P” (Park)
The jack can come out of the position (AT models).
jacking point or sink into the 3. Turn on the hazard warning flasher
ground and this can result in a and have everyone get out of the vehicle.
severe accident.
. Use only the jack provided with
your vehicle. The jack supplied
with the vehicle is designed only
for changing a tire. Never get
under the vehicle while support- 6. Take out the tool bucket and turn the
ing the vehicle with this jack. attaching bolt counterclockwise, then take
the spare tire out.
NOTE
If the spare tire provided in your vehicle
is a temporary spare tire, carefully read
“Temporary spare tire” F9-2 and
4. Put wheel blocks at the front and rear strictly follow the instructions.
of the tire diagonally opposite the flat tire.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
In case of emergency 9-7
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
– CONTINUED –
9-8 In case of emergency
12. Before putting the spare tire on, clean 15. Use the wheel nut wrench to securely 16. Store the flat tire in the spare tire
the mounting surface of the wheel and hub tighten the wheel nuts to the specified compartment. Put in the spacer and tight-
with a cloth. torque, following the tightening order in the en the attaching bolt firmly.
13. Put on the spare tire. Replace the illustration. Also store the jack, jack handle and wheel
wheel nuts. Tighten them by hand. The torque for tightening the nuts is 58 to nut wrench in their storage locations.
72 lbf·ft (80 to 100 N·m, 8 to 10 kgf·m).
WARNING This torque is equivalent to applying
approximately 88 to 110 lbs (40 to 50 kg) WARNING
Do not use oil or grease on the at the top of the wheel nut wrench. Never
wheel studs or nuts when the spare Never place a tire or tire changing
use your foot on the wheel nut wrench or a tools in the passenger compartment
tire is installed. This could cause the pipe extension on the wrench because
nuts to become loose and lead to an after changing wheels. In a sudden
you may exceed the specified torque. stop or collision, loose equipment
accident. Have the wheel nut torque checked at could strike occupants and cause
the nearest automotive service facility. injury. Store the tire and all tools in
14. Turn the jack handle counterclockwise
the proper place.
to lower the vehicle.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
In case of emergency 9-9
& Tire pressure monitoring brake suddenly and keep driving aerosol tire sealant into the tires, as
system (TPMS) (U.S.-spec. straight ahead while gradually redu- this may cause a malfunction of the
models) cing speed. Then slowly pull off the tire pressure sensors.
road to a safe place. Otherwise an If the light illuminates steadily after
accident involving serious vehicle blinking for approximately one min-
damage and serious personal injury ute, promptly contact a SUBARU
could occur. dealer to have the system inspected.
Check the pressure for all four tires
and adjust the pressure to the COLD
tire pressure shown on the vehicle
placard on the door pillar on the
driver’s side. If this light still illumi-
nates while driving after adjusting
the tire pressure, a tire may have
significant damage and a fast leak
that causes the tire to lose air
The tire pressure monitoring system pro- rapidly. If you have a flat tire, replace
vides the driver with the warning message it with a spare tire as soon as
indicated by sending a signal from a possible.
sensor that is installed in each wheel When a spare tire is mounted or a
when tire pressure is severely low. wheel rim is replaced without the
The tire pressure monitoring system will original pressure sensor/transmitter
activate only when the vehicle is driven. being transferred, the low tire pres-
Also, this system may not react immedi- sure warning light will illuminate
ately to a sudden drop in tire pressure (for steadily after blinking for approxi-
example, a blow-out caused running over mately one minute. This indicates
a sharp object). the TPMS is unable to monitor all
four road wheels. Contact your
WARNING SUBARU dealer as soon as possible
for tire and sensor replacement and/
If the low tire pressure warning light or system resetting.
illuminates while driving, never Do not inject any tire liquid or
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
9-10 In case of emergency
Jump starting eye protectors, and remove metal & How to jump start
objects such as rings, bands or
1. Make sure the booster battery is 12
other metal jewelry.
volts and the negative terminal is
WARNING . Be sure the jumper cables and grounded.
clamps on them do not have
. Battery fluid is SULFURIC ACID. 2. If the booster battery is in another
loose or missing insulation. vehicle, do not let the two vehicles touch.
Do not let it come in contact with
the eyes, skin, clothing or the Do not jump start unless cables 3. Turn off all unnecessary lights and
vehicle. in suitable condition are avail- accessories.
able. 4. Connect the jumper cables exactly in
If battery fluid gets on you,
thoroughly flush the exposed . A running engine can be danger- the sequence illustrated.
area with water immediately. Get ous. Keep your fingers, hands,
medical help if the fluid has clothing, hair and tools away
entered your eyes. from the cooling fan, belts and
any other moving engine parts.
If battery fluid is accidentally
Removing rings, watches and
swallowed, immediately drink a
ties is advisable.
large amount of milk or water,
and obtain immediate medical . Jump starting is dangerous if it
help. done incorrectly. If you are un-
sure about the proper procedure
Keep everyone including chil-
for jump starting, consult a com-
dren away from the battery.
petent mechanic.
. The gas generated by a battery
explodes if a flame or spark is When your vehicle does not start due to a
brought near it. Do not smoke or run down (discharged) battery, the vehicle
light a match while jump starting. may be jump started by connecting your
. Never attempt jump starting if the battery to another battery (called the
discharged battery is frozen. It booster battery) with jumper cables.
could cause the battery to burst
or explode.
. Whenever working on or around
a battery, always wear suitable
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
In case of emergency 9-11
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
9-12 In case of emergency
CAUTION
. Use only the specified towing
hook and tie-down hook. Never
use suspension parts or other
parts of the body for towing or
tie-down purposes.
. To prevent deformation to the
front bumper and the towing 2. Pry off the cover on the front bumper 4. Tighten the towing hook securely
hook, do not apply excessive using a screwdriver, and you will find a using a wheel nut wrench.
lateral load to the towing hook. threaded hole for attaching the towing
hook. After towing, remove the towing hook from
the vehicle and stow it in the tool bucket.
Front towing hook: Fit the towing hook cover on the bumper.
1. Take the towing hook out of the tool
bucket and take the screwdriver out of the WARNING
tool bag. Take the wheel nut wrench out of
the cargo area. . Do not use the towing hook
except when towing your vehicle.
. Be sure to remove the towing
hook after towing. Leaving the
towing hook mounted on the
vehicle could interfere with prop-
er operation of the SRS airbag
system in a frontal collision.
3. Screw the towing hook into the thread
hole until its thread can no longer be seen.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
– CONTINUED –
9-14 In case of emergency
CAUTION
If a trailer hitch is installed, it is not
possible to install the rear towing
hook.
To install the rear towing hook, the
standard bumper beam must be
installed on the vehicle at a
SUBARU dealer. Consult a SUBARU
dealer for details.
Use a hitch ball and follow the
instructions below when towing. 2. Pry off the cover on the rear bumper 4. Tighten the towing hook securely
. The weight of the object being using a screwdriver, and you will find a using a wheel nut wrench.
towed must be less than the threaded hole for attaching the towing
hook. After towing, remove the towing hook from
weight of the vehicle. the vehicle and stow it in the tool bucket.
. Drive the vehicle 20 mph (32 Fit the towing hook cover on the bumper.
km/h) or less speed.
. Do not drive more than 31 miles WARNING
(50 km).
Do not use the towing hook except
when towing your vehicle.
1. Take the towing hook out of the tool
bucket and take the screwdriver out of the
tool bag. Take the wheel nut wrench out of
the cargo area.
Front tie-down hooks: Rear tie-down hooks: & Using a flat-bed truck
The front tie-down hooks are located The rear tie-down hooks are located near This is the best way to transport your
between each of the front tires and the each of the jack-up reinforcements. vehicle. Use the following procedures to
front bumper. ensure safe transportation.
WARNING
1. Shift the selector lever into the “P”
Use the rear tie-down hooks only for position for automatic transmission mod-
downward anchoring. If they are els or “1st” for manual transmission
used to anchor the vehicle in any models.
other direction, cables may slip off 2. Pull up the parking brake lever firmly.
the hooks, possibly causing a dan- 3. Secure the vehicle onto the carrier
gerous situation. properly with safety chains. Each safety
chain should be equally tightened and
care must be taken not to pull the chains
so tightly that the suspension bottoms out.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
– CONTINUED –
9-16 In case of emergency
CAUTION
. If transmission failure occurs,
transport your vehicle on a flat-
bed truck.
1. Check the transmission and differen- . Do not run the engine while being
tial oil levels and add oil to bring it to the towed using this method. Trans-
upper level if necessary. mission damage could result if
2. Release the parking brake and put the the vehicle is towed with the
transmission in neutral. engine running.
3. The ignition switch should be in the . For vehicles with automatic
“Acc” position while the vehicle is being transmission, the traveling speed
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
In case of emergency 9-17
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
– CONTINUED –
9-18 In case of emergency
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Appearance care
10
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
10-2 Appearance care
by hand. Some warm water washers are have a smaller grain-size number and agents.
of the high temperature, high pressure could damage the paint. After polishing
type, and they can damage or deform the with a compound, coat with wax to restore
resin parts such as moldings, or cause the original luster. Frequent polishing with
water to leak into the vehicle. a compound or an incorrect polishing
technique will result in removing the paint
& Waxing and polishing layer and exposing the undercoat. When
Always wash and dry the vehicle before in doubt, it is always best to contact your
waxing and polishing. SUBARU dealer or an auto paint specia-
Use a good quality polish and wax and list.
apply them according to the manufac-
turer’s instructions. Wax or polish when NOTE
the painted surface is cool. Be careful not to block the windshield
washer nozzles with wax when waxing
Be sure to polish and wax the chrome trim, the vehicle.
as well as the painted surfaces. Loss of
wax on a painted surface leads to loss of
the original luster and also quickens the & Cleaning aluminum wheels
deterioration of the surface. It is recom- . Promptly wipe the aluminum wheels
mended that a coat of wax be applied at clean of any kind of grime or agent. If dirt
least once a month, or whenever the is left on too long, it may be difficult to
surface no longer repels water. clean off.
If the appearance of the paint has dimin- . Do not use soap containing grit to
ished to the point where the luster or tone clean the wheels. Be sure to use a neutral
cannot be restored, lightly polish the cleaning agent, and later rinse thoroughly
surface with a fine-grained compound. with water. Do not clean the wheels with a
Never polish just the affected area, but stiff brush or expose them to a high-speed
include the surrounding area as well. washing device.
Always polish in only one direction. A . Clean the vehicle (including the alumi-
No. 2000 grain compound is recom- num wheels) with water as soon as
mended. Never use a coarse-grained possible when it has been splashed with
compound. Coarse-grained compounds sea water, exposed to sea breezes, or
driven on roads treated with salt or other
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
10-4 Appearance care
Cleaning the interior & Leather seat materials & Synthetic leather upholstery
The leather used by SUBARU is a high The synthetic leather material used on the
Use a soft, damp cloth to clean the climate quality natural product which will retain its SUBARU may be cleaned using mild soap
control panel, audio equipment, instru- distinctive appearance and feel for many or detergent and water, after first vacuum-
ment panel, center console, combination years with proper care. ing or brushing away loose dirt. Allow the
meter panel, and switches. (Do not use Allowing dust or road dirt to build up on the soap to soak in for a few minutes and wipe
organic solvents.) surface can cause the material to become off with a clean, damp cloth. Commercial
brittle and to wear prematurely. Regular foam-type cleaners suitable for synthetic
& Seat fabric cleaning with a soft, moist, natural fiber leather materials may be used when
Remove loose dirt, dust or debris with a cloth should be performed monthly, taking necessary.
vacuum cleaner. If the dirt is caked on the care not to soak the leather or allow water
fabric or hard to remove with a vacuum to penetrate the stitched seams. NOTE
cleaner, use a soft brush then vacuum it. A mild detergent suitable for cleaning Strong cleaning agents such as sol-
Wipe the fabric surface with a tightly woolen fabrics may be used to remove vents, paint thinners, window cleaner
wrung cloth and dry the seat fabric difficult dirt spots, rubbing with a soft, dry or gasoline must never be used on
thoroughly. If the fabric is still dirty, wipe cloth afterwards to restore the luster. If leather or synthetic interior materials.
using a solution of mild soap and luke- your SUBARU is to be parked for a long
warm water then dry thoroughly. time in bright sunlight, it is recommended & Climate control panel, audio
that the seats and headrests be covered, panel, instrument panel,
If the stain does not come out, try a or the windows shaded, to prevent fading
commercially-available fabric cleaner. Use console panel, and switches
or shrinkage.
the cleaner on a hidden place and make Use a soft, damp cloth to clean the climate
sure it does not affect the fabric adversely. Minor surface blemishes or bald patches
control panel, audio equipment, instru-
Use the cleaner according to its instruc- may be treated with a commercial leather
ment panel, center console, combination
tions. spray lacquer. You will discover that each
meter panel, and switches.
leather seat section will develop soft folds
NOTE or wrinkles, which is characteristic of NOTE
When cleaning the seat, do not use genuine leather. Do not use organic solvents such as
benzine, paint thinner, or any similar paint thinners or gasoline, or strong
materials. cleaning agents that contain those
solvents.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
– CONTINUED –
10-6 Appearance care
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Maintenance and service
Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) Rear window wiper blade rubber ...................... 11-43
(U.S.-spec. models) ........................................ 11-31 Battery .............................................................. 11-44
Tire inspection ................................................. 11-33 Fuses ................................................................ 11-45
Tire pressures and wear ................................... 11-33 Main fuse.......................................................... 11-46
Wheel balance.................................................. 11-35
Installation of accessories .............................. 11-47
Wear indicators ................................................ 11-35
Tire rotation direction mark .............................. 11-36 Replacing bulbs ............................................... 11-47
Tire rotation ..................................................... 11-36 Headlights (models with HID headlights)........... 11-47
Tire replacement .............................................. 11-37 Headlights (models without HID headlights)...... 11-47
Wheel replacement........................................... 11-37 Position light ................................................... 11-50
Wheel covers (if equipped) ............................... 11-38 Front turn signal light ...................................... 11-50
Rear combination lights ................................... 11-50
Aluminum wheels............................................. 11-38
License plate light ........................................... 11-51
Windshield washer fluid .................................. 11-39 Dome light, map light, cargo area light and
Replacement of wiper blades .......................... 11-40 door step light ............................................... 11-51
Windshield wiper blade assembly ..................... 11-41 Other bulbs ..................................................... 11-52
Windshield wiper blade rubber ......................... 11-41
Rear window wiper blade assembly .................. 11-42
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Maintenance and service 11-3
guard against getting oil or fluids & Before checking or servicing & When you do checking or
in your eyes. If something does in the engine compartment servicing in the engine com-
get in your eyes, thoroughly partment while the engine is
wash them out with clean water. WARNING running
. Do not tamper with the wiring of
the SRS airbag system or seat- . Always stop the engine and set WARNING
belt pretensioner system, or at- the parking brake firmly to pre-
tempt to take its connectors vent the vehicle from moving. A running engine can be dangerous.
apart, as that may activate the . Always let the engine cool down. Keep your fingers, hands, clothing,
system or it can render it inop- Engine parts become very hot hair and tools away from the cooling
erative. NEVER use a circuit when the engine is running and fan, belts and any other moving
tester for this wiring. If your remain hot for some time after engine parts. Removing rings,
SRS airbag or seatbelt preten- the engine is stopped. watches and ties is advisable.
sioner needs service, consult . Do not spill engine oil, engine
your nearest SUBARU dealer. coolant, brake fluid or any other
fluid on hot engine components.
This may cause a fire.
. Always remove the key from the
ignition switch. When the ignition
switch is in the “ON” position,
the cooling fan may operate
suddenly even when the engine
is stopped.
. Before performing any servicing
on a vehicle equipped with a
remote engine start system (a
dealer option) temporarily place
that system in the service mode
to prevent it from unexpectedly
starting the engine.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Maintenance and service 11-5
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
11-6 Maintenance and service
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Maintenance and service 11-7
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
11-8 Maintenance and service
& Recommended grade and Cooling system shortened to that of the mixing
viscosity under severe driv- coolant.
ing conditions . Do not splash the engine coolant
WARNING over painted parts. The alcohol
If the vehicle is used in desert areas, in
areas with very high temperatures, or is contained in the engine coolant
Never attempt to remove the radia-
used for heavy-duty applications, use of may damage the paint surface.
tor cap until the engine has been
oil with the following grade and viscosities shut off and has cooled down
is recommended. completely. Since the coolant is
under pressure, you may suffer
& Cooling fan, hose and con-
API classification SM (or SL): serious burns from a spray of boil- nections
SAE viscosity No.: 30, 40, 10W-50, ing hot coolant when the cap is Your vehicle employs an electric cooling
20W-40, 20W-50 removed. fan which is thermostatically controlled to
operate when the engine coolant reaches
a specific temperature.
& Synthetic oil CAUTION If the radiator cooling fan does not operate
even when the coolant temperature high
You can use synthetic engine oil that . Vehicles are filled at the factory warning light blinks or illuminates in RED,
meets the same requirements given for with SUBARU Super Coolant that the cooling fan circuit may be defective.
conventional engine oil. When using does not require the first change Check the fuse and replace it if necessary.
synthetic oil, you must use oil of the same for 11 years/137,500 miles (11 If the fuse is not blown, have the cooling
classification, viscosity and grade shown years/220,000 km). This coolant system checked by your SUBARU dealer.
in this Owner’s Manual, and must follow should not be mixed with any
the oil and filter changing intervals shown other brand or type of coolant If frequent addition of coolant is neces-
in the maintenance schedule. during this period. Mixing with a sary, there may be a leak in the engine
different coolant will reduce the cooling system. It is recommended that
life of the coolant. Should it be the cooling system and connections be
necessary to top up the coolant checked for leaks, damage, or looseness.
for any reason, use only
SUBARU Super Coolant.
If the SUBARU Super Coolant is
diluted with another brand or
type, the maintenance interval is
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Maintenance and service 11-13
! Changing the coolant
& Engine coolant
! Checking the coolant level WARNING
Never attempt to remove the radia-
tor cap until the engine has been
shut off and has cooled down
completely. Since the coolant is
under pressure, you may suffer
serious burns from a spray of boil-
ing hot coolant when the cap is
removed.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
– CONTINUED –
11-14 Maintenance and service
WARNING
Do not operate the engine with the
air cleaner element removed. The air
cleaner element not only filters
intake air but also stops flames if
the engine backfires. If the air
cleaner element is not installed
when the engine backfires, you
could be burned.
1) “FULL” level mark 7. Put the radiator cap back on and
2) “LOW” level mark tighten firmly. At this time, make sure that CAUTION
the rubber gasket in the radiator cap is
CAUTION correctly in place. When replacing the air cleaner ele-
8. Start and race the engine at 2,000 to ment, use a genuine SUBARU air
. Be careful not to spill engine 3,000 rpm for 5 to 6 times within 40 cleaner element. If it is not used,
coolant when adding it. If coolant seconds. there is the possibility of causing a
touches the exhaust pipe, it may 9. Stop the engine and wait until the negative effect to the engine.
cause a bad smell, smoke, and/or coolant cools down (122 to 1408F [50 to
a fire. If engine coolant gets on 608C]). If there is any loss of coolant, add The air cleaner element functions as a
the exhaust pipe, be sure to wipe coolant to the radiator’s filler neck and to filter screen. When the element is perfo-
it off. the reserve tank’s “FULL” level. rated or removed, engine wear will be
. Do not splash the engine coolant 10. Put the radiator cap and reservoir cap excessive and engine life shortened.
over painted parts. The alcohol back on and tighten firmly.
contained in the engine coolant The air cleaner element is a dry type. It is
may damage the paint surface. unnecessary to clean or wash the ele-
ment.
6. Pour the coolant and fill to the reser-
voir tank’s “FULL” level mark.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
– CONTINUED –
11-16 Maintenance and service
1) Connector
2) Clip
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
11-18 Maintenance and service
It may be difficult to replace the spark 1) Power steering oil pump pulley
plugs. It is recommended that you have 2) Front side belt
the spark plugs replaced by your 3) Alternator pulley
SUBARU dealer. 4) Air conditioner compressor pulley
5) Rear side belt
The spark plugs should be replaced 6) Crank pulley
according to the maintenance schedule A) 22 lbf (98 N, 10 kgf)
in the “Warranty and Maintenance Book-
let”.
CAUTION
CAUTION The front side belt, which runs in
. When disconnecting the spark conjunction with the following com-
plug cables, always grasp the ponents, must be used within the
spark plug cap, not the cables. specified deflection.
. Make sure the cables are re- . Power steering oil pump pulley
placed in the correct order. . Alternator pulley
. Crank pulley
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Maintenance and service 11-19
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Maintenance and service 11-21
4. Pull out the level gauge and check the & Recommended fluid Front differential gear oil (AT
fluid level on the gauge. If it is below the
lower level on the “HOT” range, add the
models)
Use one of the following types of auto-
recommended automatic transmission matic transmission fluid. & Checking the oil level
fluid up to the upper level. SUBARU ATF
IDEMITSU ATF HP
! Checking the fluid level when the
fluid is cold
When the fluid level has to be checked NOTE
without time to warm up the automatic Using any non-specified type of auto-
transmission, check to see that the fluid matic transmission fluid could result in
level is between the lower level and upper damage inside the transmission. When
level on the “COLD” range. If it is below replacing the automatic transmission
that range, add fluid up to the upper level. fluid, be sure to use the kind specified.
Be careful not to overfill.
CAUTION
Be careful not to spill automatic 1) Yellow handle
transmission fluid when adding it.
1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and
If automatic transmission fluid
stop the engine.
touches the exhaust pipe, it may
cause a bad smell, smoke, and/or a 2. Pull out the level gauge, wipe it clean,
fire. If automatic transmission fluid and insert it again.
gets on the exhaust pipe, be sure to
wipe it off.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
– CONTINUED –
11-22 Maintenance and service
Oil grade:
API classification GL-5
1) Upper level
2) Lower level
CAUTION
Be careful not to spill front differ- SAE viscosity No. and applicable tempera-
ential gear oil when adding it. If oil ture
touches the exhaust pipe, it may
cause a bad smell, smoke, and/or a
fire. If oil gets on the exhaust pipe,
be sure to wipe it off.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Maintenance and service 11-23
1) Filler hole
2) Drain hole
3) Oil level
Remove the plug from the filler hole and
check the oil level. The oil level should be
kept even with the bottom of the filler hole.
If the oil level is below the bottom edge of
the hole, add oil through the filler hole to
raise the level.
CAUTION
. When power steering fluid is
being added, use only clean fluid,
and be careful not to allow any
dirt into the tank. And never use
different brands together.
2. Check the fluid level of the reservoir . Avoid spilling fluid when adding
tank. it in the tank.
When the fluid is hot after the vehicle has . Be careful not to spill power
The power steering fluid expands greatly been run: Check that the oil level is steering fluid when adding it. If
as its temperature rises; the fluid level between “HOT MIN” and “HOT MAX” on power steering fluid touches the
differs according to fluid temperature. the surface of the reservoir tank. exhaust pipe, it may cause a bad
Therefore, the reservoir tank has two When the fluid is cool before the vehicle is smell, smoke, and/or a fire. If
different checking ranges for hot and cold run: Check that the oil level is between power steering fluid gets on the
fluids. “COLD MIN” and “COLD MAX” on the exhaust pipe, be sure to wipe it
surface of the reservoir tank. off.
Check the power steering fluid level
3. If the fluid level is lower than the
monthly.
applicable “MIN” line, add the recom-
1. Park the vehicle on a level surface, mended fluid as necessary to bring the
and stop the engine. level between the “MIN” and “MAX” line.
If the fluid level is extremely low, it may
indicate possible leakage. Consult your
SUBARU dealer for an inspection.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Maintenance and service 11-25
& Recommended fluid Brake fluid clean water. For safety, when
performing this work, wearing
Use one of the following types of auto- & Checking the fluid level eye protection is advisable.
matic transmission fluid. . Brake fluid absorbs moisture
SUBARU ATF from the air. Any absorbed moist-
IDEMITSU ATF HP ure can cause a dangerous loss
“Dexron III” Type Automatic Transmis- of braking performance.
sion Fluid . If the vehicle requires frequent
refilling, there may be a leak. If
you suspect a problem, have the
vehicle checked at your SUBARU
dealer.
CAUTION
FMVSS No. 116, fresh DOT 3 or DOT 4 & Checking the fluid level
brake fluid CAUTION
. Clutch fluid absorbs moisture
from the air. Any absorbed moist-
CAUTION ure can cause improper clutch
operation.
Never use different brands of brake
fluid together. Also, avoid mixing . If the vehicle requires frequent
DOT 3 and DOT 4 brake fluids even if refilling, there may be a leak. If
they are the same brand. you suspect a problem, have the
vehicle checked at your SUBARU
dealer.
. Never use different brands of
clutch fluid together.
Check the fluid level on the outside of the . When clutch fluid is added, be
reservoir. If the level is below “MIN” level careful not to allow any dirt into
mark, add the recommended clutch fluid the tank.
to “MAX” level mark. . Never splash the clutch fluid over
Use only clutch fluid from a sealed painted surfaces or rubber parts.
container. Alcohol contained in the clutch
fluid may damage them.
WARNING . Be careful not to spill clutch fluid
Never let clutch fluid contact your when adding it. If clutch fluid
eyes because clutch fluid can be touches the exhaust pipe, it may
harmful to your eyes. If clutch fluid cause a bad smell, smoke, and/or
gets in your eyes, immediately flush a fire. If clutch fluid gets on the
them thoroughly with clean water. exhaust pipe, be sure to wipe it
For safety, when performing this off.
work, wearing eye protection is
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Maintenance and service 11-27
NOTE
For vehicles equipped with the brake
assist system, when you depress the
brake pedal strongly or suddenly, the
following phenomena occur. However,
even though these occur, they do not
indicate any malfunctions, and the
brake assist system is operating prop-
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
11-28 Maintenance and service
Brake pedal & Checking the brake pedal Clutch pedal (MT models)
reserve distance
Check the brake pedal free play and Check the clutch pedal free play and
reserve distance according to the main- reserve distance according to the main-
tenance schedule in the “Warranty and tenance schedule in the “Warranty and
Maintenance Booklet”. Maintenance Booklet”.
& Checking the brake pedal & Checking the clutch function
free play Check the clutch engagement and disen-
gagement.
1. With the engine idling, check that there
are no abnormal noises when the clutch
pedal is depressed, and that shifting into
1st or reverse feels smooth.
2. Start the vehicle by releasing the pedal
1) More than 2.56 in (65 mm) slowly to check that the engine and
Depress the pedal with a force of approxi- transmission smoothly couple without
mately 66 lbf (294 N, 30 kgf) and measure any sign of slippage.
the distance between the upper surface of
the pedal pad and the floor.
When the measurement is smaller than
1) 0.02 – 0.08 in (0.5 – 2.0 mm) the specification, or when the pedal does
not operate smoothly, contact with your
Stop the engine and firmly depress the SUBARU dealer.
brake pedal several times. Lightly pull the
brake pedal up with one finger to check
the free play with a force of less than 2 lbf
(10 N, 1 kgf).
If the free play is not within proper
specification, contact your SUBARU deal-
er.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Maintenance and service 11-29
& Checking the clutch pedal Hill start assist system (MT Replacement of brake pad
free play models) and lining
Ensure that the Hill start assist system
operates properly under the following
circumstances:
1. Stop the vehicle on an uphill grade by
depressing the brake pedal and clutch
pedal, with the engine running.
2. Make sure that the vehicle does not
move backward even after the brake
pedal is released.
3. Then make sure the vehicle starts
climbing the grade by following the normal
starting procedures.
1) 0.16 – 0.51 in (4.0 – 13.0 mm)
If the Hill start assist system does not The right front disc brake and the right rear
Lightly press the clutch pedal down with operate as described above, contact with
your finger until you feel resistance, and disc brake have audible wear indicators
your SUBARU dealer. on the brake pads. If the brake pads wear
check the free play.
close to their service limit, the wear
If the free play is not within proper
indicator makes a very audible scraping
specification, contact your SUBARU deal-
noise when the brake pedal is applied.
er.
If you hear this scraping noise each time
you apply the brake pedal, have the brake
pads serviced by your SUBARU dealer as
soon as possible.
CAUTION
If you continue to drive despite the
scraping noise from the audible
brake pad wear indicator, it will
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
– CONTINUED –
11-30 Maintenance and service
result in the need for costly brake range, adjust it by turning the adjusting nut Parking brake stroke
rotor repair or replacement. located on the parking brake lever.
NOTE . Correct tire pressure (tread worn . Abnormally low tire pressure (tread
. The air pressure in a tire increases evenly) worn at shoulders)
by approximately 4.3 psi (30 kPa, 0.3
kgf/cm2) when the tire becomes warm.
. The tires are considered cold when
the vehicle has been parked for at least
3 hours or has been driven less than 1
mile (1.6 km).
WARNING
Do not let air out of warm tires to
adjust pressure. Doing so will result
in low tire pressure.
Incorrect tire pressures detract from con- Roadholding is good, and steering is Rolling resistance is high, so fuel con-
trollability and ride comfort, and they responsive. Rolling resistance is low, so sumption is also higher.
cause the tires to wear abnormally. fuel consumption is also lower.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Maintenance and service 11-35
. Abnormally high tire pressure (tread the tires. The resulting loss of & Wear indicators
worn in center) vehicle control could lead to an
accident.
NOTE
For safety, inspect tire tread regularly
and replace the tires before their tread
wear indicators become visible.
& Wheel covers (if equipped) ! Installing the wheel cover Aluminum wheels
! Removing the wheel cover Aluminum wheels can be scratched and
damaged easily. Handle them carefully to
maintain their appearance, performance,
and safety.
. When any of the wheels are removed
and replaced for tire rotation or to change
a flat tire, always check the tightness of
the wheel nuts after driving approximately
600 miles (1,000 km). If any nut is loose,
tighten it to the specified torque.
. Never apply oil to the threaded parts,
wheel nuts, or tapered surface of the
Align the valve with the valve hole in the wheel.
1) Notch cover, then fit the cover on the wheel by . Never let the wheel rub against sharp
2) Valve hole tapping your hand evenly around the protrusions or curbs.
circumference of the cover. . When wheel nuts, balance weights, or
Insert a wheel cover remover into the the center cap is replaced, be sure to
notch part on the opposite side of the replace them with genuine SUBARU parts
valve hole and pry the wheel cover to designed for aluminum wheels.
remove it.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Maintenance and service 11-39
CAUTION
Never use engine coolant as washer
fluid because it could cause paint
damage.
Remove the washer tank filler cap, then In order to prevent freezing of washer
check the fluid level indicated by the level fluid, check the freezing temperatures in
gauge (attached to the inside of the cap). the table above when adjusting the fluid
If the level is near the “Low” mark, add concentration to the outside temperature.
fluid until it reaches the “Hi” level on the If you fill the reservoir tank with a fluid with
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
– CONTINUED –
11-40 Maintenance and service
a different concentration from the one Replacement of wiper blades carefully return the wiper arms
used previously, purge the old fluid from on the windshield by hand. You
the piping between the reservoir tank and Grease, wax, insects, or other material on should not return the wiper arms
washer nozzles by operating the washer the windshield or the wiper blade results in to the windshield only by the
for a certain period of time. Otherwise, if jerky wiper operation and streaking on the return spring. Otherwise, the wi-
the concentration of the fluid remaining in glass. If you cannot remove the streaks per arms may be deformed and/
the piping is too low for the outside after operating the windshield washer or if or the windshield surface may be
temperature, it may freeze and block the the wiper operation is jerky, clean the scratched.
nozzles. outer surface of the windshield (or rear
window) and the wiper blades using a If you cannot eliminate the streaking even
CAUTION sponge or soft cloth with a neutral after following this method, replace the
detergent or mild-abrasive cleaner. After wiper blades using the following proce-
Adjust the washer fluid concentra- dures.
cleaning, rinse the windshield and wiper
tion appropriately for the outside
blades with clean water. The windshield is
temperature. If the concentration is
clean if beads do not form when you rinse
inappropriate, sprayed washer fluid
the windshield with water.
may freeze on the windshield and
obstruct your view, and the fluid CAUTION
may freeze in the reservoir tank.
. Do not clean the wiper blades
with gasoline or a solvent, such
as paint thinner or benzine. This
will cause deterioration of the
wiper blades.
. While removing the wiper blades
from the wiper arms, do not
return the wiper arms to the
original positions. Otherwise,
the windshield surface may be
scratched.
. When returning the raised wiper
arms to the original positions,
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Maintenance and service 11-41
& Windshield wiper blade as- & Windshield wiper blade rub-
sembly ber
1. Raise the wiper arm off the windshield.
1) Metal spines
grooves in the rubber and slide the blade & Rear window wiper blade
rubber assembly into the support until it assembly
locks.
1. Raise the wiper arm off the rear
window.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Maintenance and service 11-43
& Rear window wiper blade 2. Pull the blade rubber assembly out of
rubber the plastic support.
ends. If the rubber is not retained properly, Battery remove rings, metal watchbands,
the wiper may scratch the rear window and other metal jewelry. Never
glass. allow metal tools to contact the
WARNING positive battery terminal and any-
thing connected to it WHILE you
. Before beginning work on or near are at the same time in contact
any battery, be sure to extinguish with any other metallic portion of
all cigarettes, matches, and light- the vehicle because a short cir-
ers. Never expose a battery to an cuit will result.
open flame or electric sparks.
. Keep everyone including children
Batteries give off a gas which is
away from the battery.
highly flammable and explosive.
. Charge the battery in a well-
. For safety, in case an explosion
ventilated area.
does occur, wear eye protection
or shield your eyes when work- . Battery posts, terminals and re-
ing near any battery. Never lean lated accessories contain lead
over a battery. and lead compounds, chemicals
known to the State of California
. Do not let battery fluid contact
to cause cancer and reproductive
eyes, skin, fabrics, or paint be-
harm. Batteries also contain
cause battery fluid is a corrosive
other chemicals known to the
acid. If battery fluid gets on your
State of California to cause can-
skin or in your eyes, immediately
cer. Wash hands after handling.
flush the area with water thor-
oughly. Seek medical help imme-
diately if acid has entered the
eyes.
If battery fluid is accidentally
swallowed, immediately drink a
large amount of milk or water,
and seek medical attention im-
mediately.
. To lessen the risk of sparks,
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Maintenance and service 11-45
Fuses
CAUTION
Never replace a fuse with one hav-
ing a higher rating or with material
other than a fuse because serious
damage or a fire could result.
CAUTION
Never use more than 10 amperes
when charging the battery because
it will shorten battery life. One is located under the instrument panel
behind the fuse box cover on the driver’s The spare fuses are stored in the main
seat side. To remove the cover, pull it out. fuse box cover in the engine compart-
ment.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
– CONTINUED –
11-46 Maintenance and service
Right-hand side
1. Use a screwdriver to undo the clips on
the air intake duct, then remove the air
intake duct (right-hand side).
3. Remove the bulb cover, by turning it
counterclockwise.
Left-hand side
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Maintenance and service 11-49
Right-hand side
1. Use a screwdriver to undo the clips on
the air intake duct, then remove the air
intake duct (right-hand side).
5. Remove the bulb from the headlight 3. Remove the bulb from the headlight
assembly by turning it counterclockwise. assembly by turning it counterclockwise.
6. Replace the bulb with a new one. At 4. Replace the bulb with new one. At this
this time, do not touch the bulb surface. time, use care not to touch the bulb
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
– CONTINUED –
11-50 Maintenance and service
1) Brake/tail light
2) Rear turn signal light
3) Back-up light
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Maintenance and service 11-51
3. Remove the bulb socket from the rear 2. Remove the cover and lens.
combination light assembly by turning it 3. Pull the bulb out of the socket. Install a
counterclockwise. new bulb.
4. Pull the bulb out of the bulb socket and 4. Reinstall the lens and cover.
replace it with a new one. 5. Tighten the mounting screws.
5. Set the bulb socket into the rear
combination light assembly and turn it & Dome light, map light, cargo
clockwise until it locks. area light and door step light
CAUTION
When the door is opened, the map
light illuminates and becomes very
7. Tighten the upper and lower screws. hot. When replacing the map light
bulb, close the door and be careful
& License plate light not to burn yourself.
12
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
12-2 Specifications
Specifications
These specifications are subject to change without notice.
& Dimensions
in (mm)
Item Non-turbo models Turbo models
Overall length 179.5 (4,560)
Overall width 70.1 (1,780)
Overall height without roof rail 65.9 (1,675)
with roof rail 66.9 (1,700)
Wheel base 103.0 (2,615)
Tread Front 60.2 (1,530)
Rear 60.2 (1,530)
Ground clearance*1 8.7 (220) 8.9 (225)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Specifications 12-3
& Engine
Engine model EJ253 EJ255
(2.5-liter, SOHC, non-turbo) (2.5-liter, DOHC, turbo)
Engine type Horizontally opposed, liquid cooled 4 cylinder, 4-stroke gasoline engine
Displacement cc (cu-in) 2,457 (150)
Bore 6 Stroke in (mm) 3.9 6 3.1 (99.5 6 79.0)
Compression ratio 10.0 : 1 8.4 : 1
Firing order 1–3–2–4
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
– CONTINUED –
12-4 Specifications
& Capacities
Fuel tank 16.9 US gal (64 liters, 14.1 Imp gal)
Engine oil 4.2 US qt (4.0 liters, 3.5 Imp qt)
Transmission oil (MT models) 3.7 US qt (3.5 liters, 3.1 Imp qt)
Transmission fluid (AT models) 9.8 US qt (9.3 liters, 8.2 Imp qt)
Front differential gear oil (AT models) 1.3 US qt (1.2 liters, 1.1 Imp qt)
Rear differential gear oil 0.8 US qt (0.8 liters, 0.7 Imp qt)
Power steering fluid 0.7 US qt (0.7 liter, 0.6 Imp qt)
Engine coolant Non-turbo models MT models 7.2 US qt (6.8 liters, 6.0 Imp qt)
AT models 7.1 US qt (6.7 liters, 5.9 Imp qt)
Turbo models 8.5 US qt (8.0 liters, 7.0 Imp qt)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Specifications 12-5
& Tires
Tire size P215/65R16 96H P225/55R17 95H
Wheel size 16 6 6 /2 J
1
16 6 6 /2 JJ
1
17 6 7 JJ
Pressure Front 30 psi (210 kPa, 2.1 kgf/cm2) 32 psi (220 kPa, 2.2 kgf/cm2)
Rear 29 psi (200 kPa, 2.0 kgf/cm2) 30 psi (210 kPa, 2.1 kgf/cm2)
2
Rear when towing trailer 35 psi (240 kPa, 2.4 kgf/cm ) 36 psi (250 kPa, 2.5 kgf/cm2)
Temporary Size T155/70 D17
spare tire
Pressure 60 psi (420 kPa, 4.2 kgf/cm2)
NOTE
For the Latin American models, there is a conventional tire installed under the floor of the cargo area.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
12-6 Specifications
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Specifications 12-7
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
– CONTINUED –
12-8 Specifications
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Specifications 12-9
Fuse Fuse
Circuit
panel rating
18 15A . Headlight (right hand)
19 15A . Headlight (left hand)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
12-10 Specifications
Bulb chart
A: The high mount stop light is the LED (Light Emitting Diode) type. Consult your SUBARU dealer for replacement.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Specifications 12-11
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
– CONTINUED –
12-12 Specifications
CAUTION
Replace any bulb only with a new
bulb of the specified wattage. Using
a bulb of different wattage could
result in a fire.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Specifications 12-13
1) Vehicle identification number
Vehicle identification 2) Emission control label
3) Tire inflation pressure label
4) Certification label
5) Vehicle identification number plate
6) Model number label
7) Fuel label
8) Air conditioner label
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Consumer information and Reporting safety defects
13
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
13-2 Consumer information and Reporting safety defects
Example: WARNING
. Speed ratings apply only to
the tire, not to the vehicle. (1) Manufacturer’s Identification
(6) Load Index: A numerical code Putting a speed rated tire on Mark
which specifies the maximum load any vehicle does not mean (2) Tire Size
a tire can carry at the speed the vehicle can be operated (3) Tire Type Code
indicated by its speed symbol, at at the tire’s rated speed.
(4) Date of Manufacture
maximum inflation pressure. . The speed rating is void if
the tires are worn out, da- The first two figures identify the
For example, “90” means 1,323 lbs week, starting with “01” to represent
maged, repaired, retreaded,
(600 kg), “89” means 1,278 lbs (580 the first full week of the calendar
or otherwise altered from
kg). year; the second two figures repre-
their original condition. If
tires are repaired, re- sent the year. For example, 0101
WARNING means the 1st week of 2001.
treaded, or otherwise al-
Load indices apply only to the tered, they may not be sui- ! Other markings
tire, not to the vehicle. Putting table for original equipment The following makings are also
a load rated tire on any vehicle tire designed loads and placed on the sidewall.
does not mean the vehicle can speeds.
be loaded up to the tire’s rated ! Maximum permissible inflation
load. pressure
! Tire Identification Number (TIN)
The maximum cold inflation pres-
(7) Speed Rating: An alphabetical Tire Identification Number (TIN) is sure to which this tire may be
system describing a tire’s capability marked on the intended outboard inflated. For example, “300 kPa
to travel at established and prede- sidewall. The TIN is composed of (44 PSI) MAX. PRESS”
termined speeds. four groups. Here is a brief review
For example, “V” means 149 mph of the TIN with a breakdown of its
(240 km/h) individual elements.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
– CONTINUED –
13-4 Consumer information and Reporting safety defects
! Construction type
Applicable construction of this tire.
For example, “TUBELESS STEEL
BELTED RADIAL”
! Construction
The generic name of each cord
material used in the plies (both
sidewall and tread area) of this tire.
For example, “PLIES: TREAD 2
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Consumer information and Reporting safety defects 13-5
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
– CONTINUED –
13-6 Consumer information and Reporting safety defects
& Glossary of tire terminology sidewall rubber which, when in- . Extra load tire
. Accessory weight flated, bears the load. A tire designed to operate at higher
The combined weight (in excess of . Chunking loads and higher inflation pressure
those standard items which may be The breaking away of pieces of the than the corresponding standard
replaced) of automatic transmis- tread or sidewall. tire.
sion, power steering, power brakes, . Cold tire pressure . Groove
power windows, power seats, radio, The pressure in a tire that has been The space between two adjacent
and heater, to the extent that these driven less than 1 mile or has been tread ribs.
items are available as factory-in- standing for three hours or more. . Innerliner
stalled equipment (whether in- . Cord The layer(s) forming the inside sur-
stalled or not). The strands forming the plies in the face of a tubeless tire that contains
. Bead tire. the inflating medium within the tire.
The part of the tire that is made of . Cord separation . Innerliner separation
steel wires, wrapped or reinforced The parting of cords from adjacent The parting of the innerliner from
by ply cords and that is shaped to fit rubber compounds. cord material in the carcass.
the rim. . Cracking . Intended outboard sidewall
. Bead separation Any parting within the tread, side- (1) The sidewall that contains a
A breakdown of the bond between wall, or inner liner of the tire whitewall, bears white lettering
components in the bead. extending to cord material. or bears manufacturer, brand,
. Bias ply tire . Curb weight and/or model name molding that
A pneumatic tire in which the ply The weight of a motor vehicle with is higher or deeper than the
cords that extend to the beads are standard equipment including the same molding on the other side-
laid at alternate angles substantially maximum capacity of fuel, oil and wall of the tire, or
less than 90 degrees to the center- (2) The outward facing sidewall
coolant, and if so equipped, air
line of the tread. of an asymmetrical tire that has
conditioning and additional weight
. Carcass a particular side that must al-
optional engine.
The tire structure, except tread and ways face outward when mount-
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
– CONTINUED –
13-8 Consumer information and Reporting safety defects
sory weight, including heavy duty . Rim type designation . Tread rib
brakes, ride levelers, roof rack, The industry of manufacturer’s des- A tread section running circumfer-
heavy duty battery, and special ignation for a rim by style or code. entially around a tire.
trim. . Rim width . Tread separation
. Radial ply tire Nominal distance between rim Pulling away of the tread from the
A pneumatic tire in which the ply flanges. tire carcass.
cords that extend to the beads are . Section width . Treadwear indicators (TWI)
laid at substantially 90 degrees to The linear distance between the The projections within the principal
the centerline of the tread. exteriors of the sidewalls of an grooves designed to give a visual
. Recommended inflation pres- inflated tire, excluding elevations indication of the degrees of wear of
sure due to labeling, decoration, or the tread.
The cold inflation pressure recom- protective bands. . Vehicle capacity weight
mended by a vehicle manufacturer. . Sidewall The rated cargo and luggage load
. Reinforced tire That portion of a tire between the plus 150 lbs (68 kg) times the
A tire designed to operate at higher tread and bead. vehicle’s designated seating capa-
loads and at higher inflation pres- . Sidewall separation city.
sures than the corresponding stan- The parting of the rubber com- . Vehicle maximum load on the
dard tire. pound from the cord material in tire
. Rim the sidewall. Load on an individual tire that is
A metal support for a tire or a tire . Test rim determined by distributing to each
and tube assembly upon which the The rim on which a tire is fitted for axle its share of the maximum
tire beads are seated. testing, and it may be any rim listed loaded vehicle weight and dividing
. Rim diameter as appropriate for use with that tire. by two.
Nominal diameter of the bead seat. . Tread . Vehicle normal load on the tire
. Rim size designation That portion of a tire that comes Load on an individual tire that is
Rim diameter and width. into contact with the road. determined by distributing to each
axle its share of the curb weight,
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
– CONTINUED –
13-10 Consumer information and Reporting safety defects
accessory weight, and normal oc- Table 1 — Occupant loading and distribution for vehicle normal load for
cupant weight (distributed in accor- various designated seating capacities
dance with Table 1 that is ap-
pended to the end of this section) Designated seating Vehicle normal load, Occupant distribution in a
and dividing by 2. capacity, number of number of occupants normally loaded vehicle
occupants
. Wheel-holding fixture
The fixture used to hold the wheel 2 through 4 2 2 in front.
and tire assembly securely during 2 in front, 1 in second
5 through 10 3 seat.
testing.
2 in front, 1 in second
11 through 15 5 seat, 1 in third seat, 1 in
fourth seat.
2 in front, 2 in second
16 through 22 7 seat, 2 in third seat, 1 in
fourth seat.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Consumer information and Reporting safety defects 13-11
& Tire care – maintenance and evenly worn tires at the time of as a trailer hitch, roof rack or bike
safety practices rotation. After tire rotation, adjust carrier, etc., and the tongue load of
. Check on a daily basis that the the tire pressures and make sure a trailer. Therefore cargo capacity
tires are free from serious damage, the wheel nuts are correctly tigh- can be calculated by the following
nails, and stones. At the same time, tened. For information about the method.
check the tires for abnormal wear. tightening torque and tightening
. Inspect the tire tread regularly
Cargo capacity = Load limit − (total
sequence for the wheel nuts, refer weight of occupants + total weight
and replace the tires before their to “Flat tires” F9-6.
tread wear indicators become visi- of optional equipment + tongue
load of a trailer (if applicable))
ble. When a tire’s tread wear & Vehicle load limit – how to
indicator becomes visible, the tire determine For information about vehicle load-
is worn beyond the acceptable limit The load capacity of your vehicle is ing, refer to “Loading your vehicle”
and must be replaced immediately. determined by weight, not by avail- F8-11.
With a tire in this condition, driving able cargo space. The load limit of
at even low speeds in wet weather For information about towing capa-
your vehicle is shown on the city and weight limits, refer to
can cause the vehicle to hydro- vehicle placard attached to the
plane. Possible resulting loss of “Trailer towing” F8-17.
driver’s side B-pillar. Locate the
vehicle control can lead to an statement “The combined weight ! Calculating total and load ca-
accident. of occupants and cargo should pacities varying seating con-
. To maximize the life of each tire never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs” figurations
and ensure that the tires wear on your vehicle’s placard. Calculate the available load capa-
uniformly, it is best to rotate the The vehicle placard also shows city as shown in the following
tires every 7,500 miles (12,000 km). seating capacity of your vehicle. examples:
For information about the tire rota- The total load capacity includes the
tion order, refer to “Tire rotation” total weight of driver and all pas-
F11-36. sengers and their belongings, any
Replace any damaged or un- cargo, any optional equipment such
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
– CONTINUED –
13-12 Consumer information and Reporting safety defects
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Consumer information and Reporting safety defects 13-13
2. Calculate the available load ca- with the statement “The combined 2. Calculate the available load ca-
pacity. weight of occupants and cargo pacity.
should never exceed 408 kg or
900 lbs”.
For example, the vehicle has one
occupant weighing 165 lbs (75 kg)
plus cargo weighing 375 lbs (170
kg). In addition, the vehicle is fitted
3. The total weight now exceeds 3. The result of step 2 shows that a
with a trailer hitch weighing 22 lbs
the capacity weight by 92 lbs (42 further 162 lbs (73 kg) of cargo can
(10 kg), to which is attached a
kg), so the cargo weight must be be carried.
trailer weighing 1,764 lbs (800 kg).
reduced by 92 lbs (42 kg) or more.
10% of the trailer weight is applied Example 2B
Example 2A to the trailer tongue (i.e. Tongue
load = 176 lbs (80 kg)).
1. Calculate the total weight.
occupants to three), and a child 3. The total weight now exceeds The GVWR and front and rear
restraint system weighing 11 lbs (5 the capacity weight by 32 lbs (15 GAWRs are determined by not only
kg) is installed in the vehicle for the kg), so the cargo weight must be the maximum load rating of tires but
child to use, the calculations are as reduced by 32 lbs (15 kg) or more. also loaded capacities of the vehi-
follows. cle’s suspension, axles and other
1. Calculate the total weight. & Determining compatibility of parts of the body.
tire and vehicle load capaci- Therefore, this means that the
ties
vehicle cannot necessarily be
The sum of four tires’ maximum loaded up to the tire’s maximum
load ratings must exceed the max- load rating on the tire sidewall.
imum loaded vehicle weight
(“GVWR”). In addition, sum of the & Adverse safety conse-
maximum load ratings of two front quences of overloading on
tires and of two rear tires must handling and stopping and
exceed each axle’s maximum on tires
loaded capacity (“GAWR”). Original Overloading could affect vehicle
equipment tires are designed to handling, stopping distance, and
fulfill those conditions. vehicle and tire performance in the
The maximum loaded vehicle following ways. This could lead to
2. Calculate the available load ca- weight is referred to Gross Vehicle an accident and possibly result in
pacity. Weight Rating (GVWR). And each severe personal injury.
axle’s maximum loaded capacity is . Vehicle stability will deteriorate.
referred to Gross Axle Weight Rat- . Heavy and/or high-mounted
ing (GAWR). The GVWR and each loads could increase the risk of
axle’s GAWR are shown on the rollover.
vehicle certification label affixed to . Stopping distance will increase.
the driver’s door. . Brakes could overheat and fail.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Consumer information and Reporting safety defects 13-15
. Suspension, bearings, axles and able cargo and luggage load capa- Uniform tire quality grading
other body parts could break or city is 650 lbs. (1,400 − 750 (5 6 standards
experience accelerated wear that 150) = 650 lbs)
will shorten vehicle life. 5. Determine the combined weight This information indicates the rela-
. Tires could fail. of luggage and cargo being loaded tive performance of passenger car
. Tread separation could occur. on the vehicle. That weight may not tires in the area of treadwear,
. Tire could separate from its rim. safely exceed the available cargo traction, and temperature resis-
and luggage load capacity calcu- tance. This is to aid the consumer
& Steps for Determining Cor- in making an informed choice in the
rect Load Limit lated in Step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a purchase of tires.
1. Locate the statement “The com- trailer, load from your trailer will be Quality grades can be found where
bined weight of occupants and transferred to your vehicle. Consult applicable on the tire sidewall be-
cargo should never exceed XXX this manual to determine how this tween tread shoulder and maxi-
pounds” on your vehicle’s placard. reduces the available cargo and mum section width. For example:
2. Determine the combined weight luggage load capacity of your ve- Treadwear 200 Traction AA Tem-
of the driver and passengers that hicle. perature A
will be riding in your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of The quality grades apply to new
the driver and passengers from pneumatic tires for use on passen-
XXX kilograms or XXX pounds. ger cars. However, they do not
4. The resulting figure equals the apply to deep tread, winter type
available amount of cargo and snow tires, space-saver or tempor-
luggage load capacity. For exam- ary use spare tires, tires with
ple, if the “XXX” amount equals nominal rim diameters of 12 inches
1,400 lbs (635 kg) and there will be or less, or to some limited produc-
five- 150 lbs (68 kg) passengers in tion tires.
your vehicle, the amount of avail- All passenger car tires must con-
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
– CONTINUED –
13-16 Consumer information and Reporting safety defects
form to Federal Safety Require- cified government test surfaces of grade C corresponds to a level of
ments in addition to these grades. asphalt and concrete. A tire marked performance which all passenger
C may have poor traction perfor- car tires must meet under the
& Treadwear mance. Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Stan-
The treadwear grade is a compara- dards No. 109. Grades B and A
tive rating based on the wear rate of WARNING represent higher levels of perfor-
the tire when tested under con- The traction grade assigned to mance on the laboratory test wheel
trolled conditions on a specified this tire is based on straight- than the minimum required by law.
government test course. ahead braking traction tests, WARNING
For example, a tire graded 150 and does not include accel-
would wear one and one-half (1- eration, cornering, hydroplan- The temperature grade for this
1/2) times as well on the govern- ing, or peak traction charac- tire is established for a tire
ment course as a tire graded 100. teristics. that is properly inflated and
The relative performance of tires not overloaded. Excessive
depends upon the actual conditions speed, underinflation, or ex-
of their use, however, and may & Temperature A, B, C cessive loading, either sepa-
depart significantly from the norm The temperature grades are A (the rately or in combination, can
due to variations in driving habits, highest), B, and C, representing the cause heat buildup and possi-
service practices and differences in tire’s resistance to the generation of ble tire failure.
road characteristics and climate. heat and its ability to dissipate heat
when tested under controlled con-
& Traction AA, A, B, C ditions on a specified indoor labora-
The traction grades, from highest to tory test wheel. Sustained high
lowest, are AA, A, B and C. Those temperature can cause the material
grades represent the tire’s ability to of the tire to degenerate and reduce
stop on wet pavement as measured tire life, and excessive temperature
under controlled conditions on spe- can lead to sudden tire failure. The
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Consumer information and Reporting safety defects 13-17
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Index
14
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
14-2 Index
D Engine
Daytime running light system....................................... 3-27 Compartment overview............................................ 11-6
Defogger................................................................... 3-35 Coolant ............................................................... 11-13
Deicer ...................................................................... 3-35 Exhaust gas (carbon monoxide) ............................. 5, 8-2
Differential gear oil Hood .................................................................... 11-5
Front ................................................................... 11-21 Oil ........................................................................ 11-8
Rear.................................................................... 11-22 Overheating ........................................................... 9-12
Dimensions ............................................................... 12-2 Starting .................................................................. 7-8
Disarming the alarm system ........................................ 2-17 Stopping................................................................ 7-10
Disc brake pad wear warning indicators ........................ 7-24 Exterior care .............................................................. 10-2
Dome light .................................................................. 6-2
Door F
Locks ..................................................................... 2-4 Flat tires ..................................................................... 9-6
Open warning light ................................................. 3-18 Floor mat................................................................... 6-12
Drive belts................................................................ 11-18 Fluid level
Driving Automatic transmission ......................................... 11-20
All-Wheel Drive warning light ................................... 3-18 Brake.................................................................. 11-25
Car phone/cell phone .................................................. 7 Clutch ................................................................. 11-26
Drinking ..................................................................... 6 Power steering ..................................................... 11-24
Drugs ........................................................................ 6 Fog light
Foreign countries ..................................................... 8-4 Indicator light ......................................................... 3-21
Pets .......................................................................... 7 Switch................................................................... 3-28
Snowy and icy roads ................................................ 8-9 Folding mirror switch................................................... 3-35
Tips......................................................... 7-16, 8-2, 8-5 Front
Tired or sleepy............................................................ 7 Differential gear oil................................................ 11-21
Fog light indicator light ............................................ 3-21
E Seatbelt pretensioners ............................................ 1-20
Electrical system........................................................ 12-3 Seats ..................................................................... 1-2
Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD) Turn signal light.................................................... 11-50
system........................................................... 3-17, 7-26 Front fog light............................................................. 3-28
Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR)............................. 1-12
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Index 14-5
Front seats High/low beam change (dimmer) .................................. 3-26
Forward and backward adjustment ............................. 1-3 Hill start assist (MT vehicles) ............................. 7-35, 11-29
Power seat.............................................................. 1-4 Hill start assist warning light................................. 3-18, 7-36
Reclining................................................................. 1-3 Horn ......................................................................... 3-38
Seat height adjustment (driver’s seat) ......................... 1-4 Hose and connections............................................... 11-12
Fuel ........................................................................... 7-3
Consumption indicator ............................................ 3-22 I
Economy hints......................................................... 8-2 Ignition switch ............................................................. 3-3
Filler lid and cap ...................................................... 7-4 Light ...................................................................... 3-5
Gauge .................................................................... 3-8 Illuminated entry .......................................................... 2-9
Requirements .......................................................... 7-3 Illumination brightness control ...................................... 3-28
Fuses ...................................................................... 11-45 Immobilizer ................................................................. 2-2
Fuses and circuits ...................................................... 12-6 Indicator light .......................................................... 2-3
Indicator light (security indicator light)........................ 3-20
G Indicator light
GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) .............................. 8-13 Coolant temperature low.......................................... 3-13
Glove box ................................................................... 6-5 Cruise control ................................................ 3-21, 7-39
GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) .......................... 8-13 Cruise control set ........................................... 3-21, 7-39
Front fog light......................................................... 3-21
H Headlight............................................................... 3-21
Hazard warning flasher ........................................... 3-5, 9-2 High beam............................................................. 3-21
Head restraint adjustment Immobilizer ............................................................. 2-3
Front seat ............................................................... 1-5 Security................................................................. 3-20
Rear seat................................................................ 1-8 Selector lever/Gear position ..................................... 3-21
Headlight SPORT mode ........................................................ 3-20
Beam lever ........................................................... 3-27 Traction control system OFF .................................... 3-19
Flasher ................................................................. 3-26 Turn signal ............................................................ 3-21
Indicator light......................................................... 3-21 Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF......................... 3-20, 7-29
Headlights........................................................ 3-26, 11-47 Vehicle Dynamics Control operation.................. 3-19, 7-29
Heater operation (manual climate control system) ............ 4-5 Information display...................................................... 3-22
High beam indicator light ............................................ 3-21 Inside mirror .............................................................. 3-32
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
14-6 Index
Interior lights ............................................................... 6-2 Lower and tether anchorage ........................................ 1-30
J M
Jack and jack handle.................................................... 9-5 Main fuse ................................................................ 11-46
Jack-up point............................................................... 9-6 Maintenance
Jump starting............................................................. 9-10 Precautions ........................................................... 11-3
Schedule ............................................................... 11-3
K Seatbelt................................................................. 1-20
Key Tools...................................................................... 9-4
Number .................................................................. 2-2 Malfunction indicator lamp (check engine warning light)... 3-12
Reminder chime....................................................... 3-5 Manual
Replacement ........................................................... 2-4 Climate control system ............................................. 4-3
Keyless entry system ................................................... 2-7 Seat....................................................................... 1-3
Keys .......................................................................... 2-2 Transmission ......................................................... 7-15
Transmission oil ................................................... 11-19
L Map light .................................................................... 6-3
Leather seat materials ................................................ 10-5 Maximum load limits ................................................... 8-18
License plate light ..................................................... 11-51 Meters and gauges...................................................... 3-5
Light Mirror defogger .......................................................... 3-35
Cargo area.............................................................. 6-3 Mirrors ...................................................................... 3-32
Control switch........................................................ 3-25 Moonroof................................................................... 2-23
Dome ..................................................................... 6-2
Front fog............................................................... 3-28 N
Ignition switch.......................................................... 3-5 New vehicle break-in driving ......................................... 8-2
License plate ........................................................ 11-51
Map ....................................................................... 6-3 O
Rear combination.................................................. 11-50 Odometer/Trip meter .................................................... 3-6
Loading your vehicle .................................................. 8-11 Oil filter ..................................................................... 11-9
Low fuel warning light ........................................... 3-8, 3-18 Oil level
Low tire pressure warning light .................................... 3-15 Engine .................................................................. 11-8
Front differential gear ............................................ 11-21
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Index 14-7
Manual transmission.............................................. 11-19 R
Rear differential .................................................... 11-22 Rear
Oil pressure warning light............................................ 3-14 Combination lights ................................................ 11-50
On-pavement and off-road driving .................................. 8-6 Gate ............................................................. 2-22, 9-17
Outside Seats ..................................................................... 1-7
Mirror defogger ...................................................... 3-35 Rear differential
Mirrors .......................................................... 3-34, 3-35 Gear oil ............................................................... 11-22
Temperature indicator ............................................. 3-23 Rear seat
Overhead console ........................................................ 6-7 Center table............................................................ 6-7
Overheating engine .................................................... 9-12 Folding down ......................................................... 1-10
Reclining ................................................................ 1-9
P Rear turn signal........................................................ 11-50
Parking Rear window
Brake ................................................................... 7-33 Defogger ............................................................... 3-35
Brake stroke......................................................... 11-30 Wiper and washer switch......................................... 3-32
Tips...................................................................... 7-33 Wiper blades........................................................ 11-42
Parking your vehicle ................................................... 7-33 Recommended
Periodic inspections ..................................................... 8-4 Automatic transmission fluid................................... 11-21
Petrol fuel ................................................................... 7-3 Brake fluid ........................................................... 11-26
Power Clutch fluid .......................................................... 11-27
Door locking switch .................................................. 2-6 Engine oil ................................................... 11-11, 11-12
Outside mirrors ...................................................... 3-35 Front differential gear oil........................................ 11-22
Seat ....................................................................... 1-4 Manual transmission oil ......................................... 11-20
Steering ................................................................ 7-23 Power steering fluid .............................................. 11-25
Steering fluid ........................................................ 11-24 Rear differential gear oil ........................................ 11-23
Windows............................................................... 2-20 Spark plugs ......................................................... 11-18
Precautions against vehicle modification ............... 1-23, 1-60 Refueling.................................................................... 7-4
Preparing to drive ........................................................ 7-8 Remote engine start system ........................................ 7-11
Remote keyless entry system ....................................... 2-7
Replacement
Brake pad and lining ............................................. 11-29
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
14-8 Index
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
3
13
12
4
11
10
5
9
7 8
6 000134
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
GAS STATION REFERENCE
& Fuel: & Fuel capacity:
! Non-turbo models 16.9 US gal (64 liters, 14.1 Imp gal)
Use only unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of 87 AKI or & Engine oil:
higher.
Use only the following oils.
! Turbo models . ILSAC GF-4, which can be identified with the ILSAC
Use premium unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of 91 certification mark (Starburst mark)
AKI or higher. If premium unleaded gasoline with an octane . or API classification SM with the words “ENERGY CON-
rating of 91 AKI is not available, regular unleaded gasoline with SERVING”
octane rating of 87 AKI or higher may be temporarily used. For
optimum engine performance and driveability, it is required that For the complete viscosity requirements, refer to the following
you use premium grade unleaded gasoline with an octane sections.
rating of 91 AKI or higher. . “Recommended grade and viscosity” F11-11
. “Recommended grade and viscosity under severe driving
& Fuel octane rating: conditions” F11-12
This octane rating is the average of the Research Octane and & Engine oil capacity:
Motor Octane numbers and is commonly referred to as the Anti
Knock Index (AKI). Refer to “Fuel octane rating” F7-3. 4.2 US qt (4.0 liters, 3.5 Imp qt)
NOTE
I
nfor
mat i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
For the Latin American models, there is a conventional tire installed under the floor of the cargo area.
2010 FORESTER Owner’s Manual
2010 FORESTER Owner’s Manual
A8150BE-A
Issued February 2009
MSA5M1003A
Printed in USA 03/09
2010A
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby: